D1300 Series Basic Operation Guide Manual D1370 1350 1320 En Us R 1

User Manual: Manual Canon imageCLASS D1320 User Manual | Manual Device

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 180 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
Next
Page
Before Using the Machine
P.1-1
1
Document and Paper Handling
P.2-1
2
Copying
P.3-1
3
Printing from a Computer
P.4-1
4
Registering Destinations
in the Address Book
P.5-1
5
Using the Fax Functions
P.6-1
6
Using the Scan Functions
P.7-1
7
Maintenance
P.8-1
8
Troubleshooting
P.9-1
9
Registering/
Setting the Various Functions
P.
10
-1
10
Appendix
P.
11
-1
11
Basic Operation Guide
Be sure to read the manual before using
the machine.
Keep the manual for future reference.
Network Setting Procedure
Security Functions
Searching the Installation and
Connection Procedure
See the Starter Guide.
See the e-Manual.
User Software CD-ROM
Searching in Detail
ii
Copy
Adjusting the Image Quality According to the Document
For details, see "Copying" from p. 3-1.
Print Fax Scan
Copy Print Fax Scan
You can adjust the density of copies according to the
document.
<Light> <Dark>
Image Quality Adjustment
Enlarged/Reduced Copies Reduced Layout
Copying ID Card
2 on 1
4 on 1
2-Sided Copying
Collating
Density Adjustment
You can adjust the image quality according to the types of
documents.
A correct selection is necessary for the optimal
reproduction of the document.
You can directly print the data loaded into the USB memory which has been connected to the machine.
<Text/Photo> <Photo> <Text>
Various Copy Functions
For details, see "Copying" from p. 3-1.
You can enlarge or reduce standard size documents to copy
on standard size paper or specify the copy ratio in
percentage.
You can copy 1-sided documents on both sides of paper.
You can sort copies into sets arranged in page order.
You can reduce multiple documents to copy them onto one
sheet.
You can make a copy of a 2-sided card onto one side of
paper.
3
2
11
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
Network Settings & Remote UI
Network Settings & Remote UI
You can copy with the background color of the document
erased.
You can also adjust the background for each color.
Background Adjustment
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
There are a variety of copy functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. You
can enlarge or reduce copies as well as copy multiple documents onto one sheet. Additionally, you can erase the
background of the document or adjust the density and image quality before copying.
Below is a quick overview of highlighted copy features that you can utilize in your everyday use.
Sharpness Adjustment
You can emphasize the outline of the image in the
document or decrease the contrast.
Set ＜−＞ Set ＜＋＞
Data Print
You can enlarge or reduce standard size documents to
copy on standard size paper or specify the copy ratio in
percentage.
You can print on both sides of paper.
You can reduce multiple documents to print them onto one
sheet.
Booklet printing allows you to make a booklet by folding
printouts in half.
You can magnify and divide a single page image to print it out
on multiple sheets of paper. You can make one large poster
by joining these printouts together.
You can superimpose watermarks (such as [COPY] and
[DRAFT]) over the documents created by an application.
You can check the printout result on a computer display.
Some printer driver settings are provided as "Profiles"
beforehand.
You can perform printing which suits your needs only by
selecting a "Profile."
Printing documents from a computer
For details, see "Printing from a Computer" from p. 4-1.
Printing documents from a USB memory (Media printing)
For details, see "Printing" in the e-Manual.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Booklet Printing
Watermark Printing
Displaying a Preview before Printing
Selecting a "Profile"
Poster Printing
Reduced Layout
2-Sided Printing
There are a variety of print functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. You
can enlarge or reduce documents, print multiple-page data onto one sheet, and perform 2-sided printing. Also you
can print from a USB memory connected to the machine as well as from a computer.
Below is a quick overview of highlighted print features that you can utilize in your everyday use.
Various Printing Functions
Miscellaneous Printing Functions
iii
Copy
Adjusting the Image Quality According to the Document
For details, see "Copying" from p. 3-1.
Print Fax Scan
Copy Print Fax Scan
You can adjust the density of copies according to the
document.
<Light> <Dark>
Image Quality Adjustment
Enlarged/Reduced Copies Reduced Layout
Copying ID Card
2 on 1
4 on 1
2-Sided Copying
Collating
Density Adjustment
You can adjust the image quality according to the types of
documents.
A correct selection is necessary for the optimal
reproduction of the document.
You can directly print the data loaded into the USB memory which has been connected to the machine.
<Text/Photo> <Photo> <Text>
Various Copy Functions
For details, see "Copying" from p. 3-1.
You can enlarge or reduce standard size documents to copy
on standard size paper or specify the copy ratio in
percentage.
You can copy 1-sided documents on both sides of paper.
You can sort copies into sets arranged in page order.
You can reduce multiple documents to copy them onto one
sheet.
You can make a copy of a 2-sided card onto one side of
paper.
3
2
11
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
1
3
2
1
3
2
1
Network Settings & Remote UI
Network Settings & Remote UI
You can copy with the background color of the document
erased.
You can also adjust the background for each color.
Background Adjustment
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
There are a variety of copy functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. You
can enlarge or reduce copies as well as copy multiple documents onto one sheet. Additionally, you can erase the
background of the document or adjust the density and image quality before copying.
Below is a quick overview of highlighted copy features that you can utilize in your everyday use.
Sharpness Adjustment
You can emphasize the outline of the image in the
document or decrease the contrast.
Set ＜−＞ Set ＜＋＞
Data Print
You can enlarge or reduce standard size documents to
copy on standard size paper or specify the copy ratio in
percentage.
You can print on both sides of paper.
You can reduce multiple documents to print them onto one
sheet.
Booklet printing allows you to make a booklet by folding
printouts in half.
You can magnify and divide a single page image to print it out
on multiple sheets of paper. You can make one large poster
by joining these printouts together.
You can superimpose watermarks (such as [COPY] and
[DRAFT]) over the documents created by an application.
You can check the printout result on a computer display.
Some printer driver settings are provided as "Profiles"
beforehand.
You can perform printing which suits your needs only by
selecting a "Profile."
Printing documents from a computer
For details, see "Printing from a Computer" from p. 4-1.
Printing documents from a USB memory (Media printing)
For details, see "Printing" in the e-Manual.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Booklet Printing
Watermark Printing
Displaying a Preview before Printing
Selecting a "Profile"
Poster Printing
Reduced Layout
2-Sided Printing
There are a variety of print functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. You
can enlarge or reduce documents, print multiple-page data onto one sheet, and perform 2-sided printing. Also you
can print from a USB memory connected to the machine as well as from a computer.
Below is a quick overview of highlighted print features that you can utilize in your everyday use.
Various Printing Functions
Miscellaneous Printing Functions
iv
One-touch keys
Coded dialing
Group dialing
Fax driver screen
You can send a document or image created in an application
as a fax directly using the fax driver from a computer on a
network. Because you do not need to print the document, you
can reduce the paper cost as well as send a clear document
which has little dirt or blur.
You can import the address book using the fax driver,
enabling you to send a fax to a destination easily without
mistakes.
You can also create a cover sheet for when sending a fax.
You can forward received faxes stored in the
memory to a specified destination.
By registering destinations for sending faxes
beforehand, you can save many steps to enter
the destinations when sending the documents.
Copy Print Fax Scan
Copy Print Fax Scan
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
Network Settings & Remote UI
Network Settings & Remote UI
Sending a Document Directly from a Computer (PC Fax)
For details, see "Fax" in the e-Manual.
Forwarding the Received Fax
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
For details, see "Registering Destinations in the Address Book" from p. 5-1.
For details, see "Using the Fax Functions" from p. 6-1.
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
There are a variety of fax functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. The
machine is also equipped with the PC Fax function which can send a document from a computer directly, which
reduces paper costs.
Below is a quick overview of highlighted fax features that you can utilize in your everyday use.
Received Fax Forward
Various Sending Functions
Various Receiving Functions
Various Methods for Specifying a Destination
You can register fax destinations in the address book. You can
specify the destinations using various methods, enabling you to
send documents quickly and easily.
By registering destinations in one-touch keys, you can specify
a destination in one step.
You can register up to 4 destinations in one-touch keys.
Because you can register up to 100 destinations under coded
dial codes, you can register destinations which cannot be
registered under one-touch keys.
If you forget the coded dial codes, you can specify the
destination by searching it in the address book.
Received documents are normally printed immediately.
However, you can store the documents temporarily in the
memory without printing.
You can print the stored documents at any time. If you do not
need them, you can delete them, saving paper to be used.
If an external telephone is connected, you can switch to the
fax receiving mode immediately by dialing the ID number for
fax receiving using the dial buttons of the telephone during a
phone call.
You can combine multiple destinations and register them as a
group.
Up to 50 destinations can be combined.
By scanning a document once, you can send the same
document to multiple destinations.
Various Sending/Receiving Functions
For details, see "Using the Fax Functions" from p. 6-1.
Destination search
Destination Group
Sequential broadcast
Specifying from the sending history
One-touch keys
Coded dialing
Receiving in the Memory Remote Receiving
Send
Data is created
in a computer
BBBBB
AAAAA
CCCCC
A A A
BBB
# # #
Dial Code
A A AA
BBBB
CCCC
The previous setting
The second previous setting
The third previous setting
AAA
CCC
MMM
SSS
(D1370/D1350 only)
(D1370/D1350 only)
* Youneedtoinstallthefaxdriverinacomputer.
* IfyouareaMacintoshuser,seethefollowing.
 •ToinstalltheFaxDriver
→MFDriverInstallationGuideorCanonFaxDriverGuide
 •Toviewhowtouseeachfunction
→FaxDriver’sHelp
To view how to display the Canon Fax Driver Guide or Fax Driver’s Help, see “For
Macintosh Users” (→P. 11-4)
v
One-touch keys
Coded dialing
Group dialing
Fax driver screen
You can send a document or image created in an application
as a fax directly using the fax driver from a computer on a
network. Because you do not need to print the document, you
can reduce the paper cost as well as send a clear document
which has little dirt or blur.
You can import the address book using the fax driver,
enabling you to send a fax to a destination easily without
mistakes.
You can also create a cover sheet for when sending a fax.
You can forward received faxes stored in the
memory to a specified destination.
By registering destinations for sending faxes
beforehand, you can save many steps to enter
the destinations when sending the documents.
Copy Print Fax Scan
Copy Print Fax Scan
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
Network Settings & Remote UI
Network Settings & Remote UI
Sending a Document Directly from a Computer (PC Fax)
For details, see "Fax" in the e-Manual.
Forwarding the Received Fax
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
For details, see "Registering Destinations in the Address Book" from p. 5-1.
For details, see "Using the Fax Functions" from p. 6-1.
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
There are a variety of fax functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. The
machine is also equipped with the PC Fax function which can send a document from a computer directly, which
reduces paper costs.
Below is a quick overview of highlighted fax features that you can utilize in your everyday use.
Received Fax Forward
Various Sending Functions
Various Receiving Functions
Various Methods for Specifying a Destination
You can register fax destinations in the address book. You can
specify the destinations using various methods, enabling you to
send documents quickly and easily.
By registering destinations in one-touch keys, you can specify
a destination in one step.
You can register up to 4 destinations in one-touch keys.
Because you can register up to 100 destinations under coded
dial codes, you can register destinations which cannot be
registered under one-touch keys.
If you forget the coded dial codes, you can specify the
destination by searching it in the address book.
Received documents are normally printed immediately.
However, you can store the documents temporarily in the
memory without printing.
You can print the stored documents at any time. If you do not
need them, you can delete them, saving paper to be used.
If an external telephone is connected, you can switch to the
fax receiving mode immediately by dialing the ID number for
fax receiving using the dial buttons of the telephone during a
phone call.
You can combine multiple destinations and register them as a
group.
Up to 50 destinations can be combined.
By scanning a document once, you can send the same
document to multiple destinations.
Various Sending/Receiving Functions
For details, see "Using the Fax Functions" from p. 6-1.
Destination search
Destination Group
Sequential broadcast
Specifying from the sending history
One-touch keys
Coded dialing
Receiving in the Memory Remote Receiving
Send
Data is created
in a computer
BBBBB
AAAAA
CCCCC
A A A
BBB
# # #
Dial Code
A A AA
BBBB
CCCC
The previous setting
The second previous setting
The third previous setting
AAA
CCC
MMM
SSS
(D1370/D1350 only)
(D1370/D1350 only)
vi
Remote UI Functions
1
2
Start the web browser.
Enter "http://<the IP address of the
machine>/" in the address field, and
then press the [ENTER] key on your
keyboard.
3Log on to the Remote UI.
(1) Select [Management Mode] or [End-User Mode].
(2) For [Management Mode], enter [System Manager ID]
and [System Manager PIN].
For [End-User Mode], enter [User Name].
(3) Click [Log in].
Copy Print Fax Scan
Copy Print Fax Scan
Network Settings & Remote UI
Network Settings & Remote UI
Saving in a Computer
There are two methods for saving scanned documents in a computer.
Scanning with the MF Toolbox*
Scanning is performed by operating the software
supplied with the machine.
* MF Toolbox for Macintosh and MF Toolbox for Windows
may be different in some features.
For details, see the Canon Scanner Driver Guide.
Scanning from an Application
Scanning is performed using
your application.
This allows you to open the
scanned data as is in your
application.
You can easily save scanned documents in a computer only by
operating the operation panel of the machine.
Various scanning settings have been prepared for your purposes.
Therefore, you can create a "Searchable PDF*" file, which can be used
for text retrieval or as text data, without specifying special settings.
* If you are using Macintosh, you may not create "Searchable PDF."
Scanning with the WIA Driver (Windows XP/Vista/7/8 Only)
Scanning is performed using the driver system supplied with
Windows operating systems.
There are various scanning methods.
・
Scanning from the [Scanner and Camera Wizard] dialog box
・
Scanning from the [Windows Fax and Scan] dialog box
・Scanning from Windows Photo Gallery
・Scanning from an Application
Saving the Documents Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Saving the Documents Using Operations from a Computer
You can save scanned documents in a
USB memory connected to the
machine.
How to start the Remote UI
For details, see "Scan" in the e-Manual.
For details, see "Using the Scan Functions" from p. 7-1.
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
There are a variety of scan functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. You
can easily save scanned documents into your computer or a USB memory, and also send them to your e-mail
application or a file server directly from the machine.
Below is a quick overview of highlighted scan features that you can utilize in your everyday use.
Documents Data
You can send scanned documents to
your e-mail application.
You can send scanned documents to a
file server.
Documents Data E-mail
+
Documents Data File server
Basic Network Settings
Setting the IP address (IPv6)
Setting the IP address (IPv4)
System administrator settings
Checking the status and information
of the machine
Job Management
Preferences
IP address filtering
MAC address filtering
SNMP settings
Allowing the HTTP communication
Setting a port number
Dedicated port settings
Address book PIN
Secure printing
Restricting new destinations
Restricting the PC fax
Restricting sending from history
Fax number confirmation re-entry
Restricting sequential broadcast
Restricting displaying the job history
Restricting USB connection
Restricting job operations
Device information
Dept. ID management
Remote UI On/Off
Configuring the machine Communication mode/
Communication speed
Waiting time for connection
DNS
WINS server
Configuring a computer
- IP address
- Subnet mask
- Gateway address
As needed
Configuration for communicating
with a computer
- LPD, RAW, WSD
- Port settings
- Sharing settings for the printer
As needed
Miscellaneous Settings
Administration Settings
- Manager ID/PIN
- Device name/Installation site
- Department ID/PIN/
Function restriction
- Unknown ID job management
Restricting Connection
to a Network or Computer
Printing Functions/Restricting Destination
Operations/Sending Functions
Various Network Settings
For details, see "Network Settings" in the e-Manual.
Security Settings
For details, see "Security" in the e-Manual.
Configuring Using the Remote UI
For details, see "Setting and Managing from Computer" in the e-Manual.
e-Manual → Starting the Remote UI
There are a variety of network settings that are explained in the e-Manual. Since the machine has a built-in network
board, you can print, fax, and scan from a computer via a network. You can also perform efficient management by
configuring the machine using the Remote UI.
Below is a quick overview of highlighted network settings that you can utilize in your everyday use.
1
23
Documents
Data
1
2 3
Documents
Data
Function settings
System settings
Address book management
Saving in a USB Memory
For details, see "Using the Scan Functions" from p. 7-1.
Emailing scanned documents (D1370 only)
For details, see "Using the Scan Functions" from p. 7-1.
Sending scanned documents to a file server (D1370 only)
For details, see "Using the Scan Functions" from p. 7-1.
vii
Remote UI Functions
1
2
Start the web browser.
Enter "http://<the IP address of the
machine>/" in the address field, and
then press the [ENTER] key on your
keyboard.
3Log on to the Remote UI.
(1) Select [Management Mode] or [End-User Mode].
(2) For [Management Mode], enter [System Manager ID]
and [System Manager PIN].
For [End-User Mode], enter [User Name].
(3) Click [Log in].
Copy Print Fax Scan
Copy Print Fax Scan
Network Settings & Remote UI
Network Settings & Remote UI
Saving in a Computer
There are two methods for saving scanned documents in a computer.
Scanning with the MF Toolbox*
Scanning is performed by operating the software
supplied with the machine.
* MF Toolbox for Macintosh and MF Toolbox for Windows
may be different in some features.
For details, see the Canon Scanner Driver Guide.
Scanning from an Application
Scanning is performed using
your application.
This allows you to open the
scanned data as is in your
application.
You can easily save scanned documents in a computer only by
operating the operation panel of the machine.
Various scanning settings have been prepared for your purposes.
Therefore, you can create a "Searchable PDF*" file, which can be used
for text retrieval or as text data, without specifying special settings.
* If you are using Macintosh, you may not create "Searchable PDF."
Scanning with the WIA Driver (Windows XP/Vista/7/8 Only)
Scanning is performed using the driver system supplied with
Windows operating systems.
There are various scanning methods.
・
Scanning from the [Scanner and Camera Wizard] dialog box
・
Scanning from the [Windows Fax and Scan] dialog box
・Scanning from Windows Photo Gallery
・Scanning from an Application
Saving the Documents Using the Operation Panel of the Machine
Saving the Documents Using Operations from a Computer
You can save scanned documents in a
USB memory connected to the
machine.
How to start the Remote UI
For details, see "Scan" in the e-Manual.
For details, see "Using the Scan Functions" from p. 7-1.
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
Quick View- Perform Useful Tasks
There are a variety of scan functions that are explained in later pages of this manual as well as in the e-Manual. You
can easily save scanned documents into your computer or a USB memory, and also send them to your e-mail
application or a file server directly from the machine.
Below is a quick overview of highlighted scan features that you can utilize in your everyday use.
Documents Data
You can send scanned documents to
your e-mail application.
You can send scanned documents to a
file server.
Documents Data E-mail
+
Documents Data File server
Basic Network Settings
Setting the IP address (IPv6)
Setting the IP address (IPv4)
System administrator settings
Checking the status and information
of the machine
Job Management
Preferences
IP address filtering
MAC address filtering
SNMP settings
Allowing the HTTP communication
Setting a port number
Dedicated port settings
Address book PIN
Secure printing
Restricting new destinations
Restricting the PC fax
Restricting sending from history
Fax number confirmation re-entry
Restricting sequential broadcast
Restricting displaying the job history
Restricting USB connection
Restricting job operations
Device information
Dept. ID management
Remote UI On/Off
Configuring the machine Communication mode/
Communication speed
Waiting time for connection
DNS
WINS server
Configuring a computer
- IP address
- Subnet mask
- Gateway address
As needed
Configuration for communicating
with a computer
- LPD, RAW, WSD
- Port settings
- Sharing settings for the printer
As needed
Miscellaneous Settings
Administration Settings
- Manager ID/PIN
- Device name/Installation site
- Department ID/PIN/
Function restriction
- Unknown ID job management
Restricting Connection
to a Network or Computer
Printing Functions/Restricting Destination
Operations/Sending Functions
Various Network Settings
For details, see "Network Settings" in the e-Manual.
Security Settings
For details, see "Security" in the e-Manual.
Configuring Using the Remote UI
For details, see "Setting and Managing from Computer" in the e-Manual.
e-Manual → Starting the Remote UI
There are a variety of network settings that are explained in the e-Manual. Since the machine has a built-in network
board, you can print, fax, and scan from a computer via a network. You can also perform efficient management by
configuring the machine using the Remote UI.
Below is a quick overview of highlighted network settings that you can utilize in your everyday use.
1
23
Documents
Data
1
2 3
Documents
Data
Function settings
System settings
Address book management
Saving in a USB Memory
For details, see "Using the Scan Functions" from p. 7-1.
Emailing scanned documents (D1370 only)
For details, see "Using the Scan Functions" from p. 7-1.
Sending scanned documents to a file server (D1370 only)
For details, see "Using the Scan Functions" from p. 7-1.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
viii
C o n t e n t s
Supported Paper Types 2-6
Paper Size 2-6
Paper Type 2-7
Printable Area 2-8
Loading Paper 2-9
In the Paper Drawer 2-9
In the Multi-Purpose Tray 2-10
Precautions when Loading Paper 2-12
Paper Loading Capacity 2-12
Paper Loading Orientation 2-13
When printing paper with a letterhead or logo
(previously printed paper) 2-13
When printing on envelopes 2-13
Setting the Paper Size and Type 2-14
For the Paper Drawer 2-14
Setting a Custom Paper Size 2-14
Registering the Default Paper Settings for
the Multi-purpose Tray 2-15
Selecting the Print Side 2-17
When <Print Speed Priority> is selected (the default setting) 2-17
When <Print Side Priority> is selected 2-17
Copying 3-1
Basic Copy Operations 3-2
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs 3-3
Canceling a copy job using [ ] (Stop) 3-3
Checking and canceling a copy job using [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) 3-3
Copy Settings 3-4
Selecting Copy Papers 3-4
Adjusting the Density 3-5
Selecting the Document Type 3-5
2-Sided Copying 3-6
Enlarging/Reducing Copies 3-7
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1) 3-7
Collating Copies 3-8
Erasing Dark Borders or Frame Lines ( Frame Erase) 3-8
Emphasizing the Outline of an Image (Sharpness) 3-8
Copying an ID Card 3-9
Registering and Using Combination of Copy Settings
(Mode Memory) 3-10
Registering Mode Memory 3-10
Deleting Mode Memory 3-10
Calling and Copying Mode Memory 3-11
Changing the Default Settings 3-12
Viewing Copy Settings 3-13
Contents viii
Manuals for the Machine xi
Available Features xii
How to Use This Manual xiii
Important Safety Instructions xiv
Installation Requirements and Handling xviii
Legal Notices xx
Laser Safety xxiv
Before Using the Machine 1-1
Parts and Their Functions 1-2
Front Side 1-2
Back Side 1-3
Interior 1-3
Operation Panel 1-4
FAX operation panel (D1370/D1350 Only) 1-5
LCD (Standby Mode) 1-6
Copy Mode 1-6
Fax Mode (D1370/D1350 Only) 1-6
Scan Mode 1-6
USB Direct Print Mode 1-6
Navigating the Menu 1-7
Entering the Menu Screen 1-7
Scrolling the Menu 1-7
Selecting a Menu Item 1-7
Configuring Menus Using the Navigation Keys 1-7
Returning to the Default Screen 1-8
Entering Text 1-9
Changing the Entry Mode 1-9
Entering Text, Symbols, and Numbers 1-9
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space) 1-9
Deleting text, symbols, or numbers 1-9
Setting the Sleep Timer 1-11
Setting the Current Date and Time 1-12
Document and Paper Handling 2-1
Document Type 2-2
Supported Document Types 2-2
Scan Area 2-3
Copy 2-3
FAX 2-3
Scan 2-3
Placing Documents 2-4
Placing Documents on the Platen Glass 2-4
Placing Documents in the Feeder 2-4
ix
Printing from a Computer 4-1
Preparing to Print from Your Computer 4-2
Printing from a Computer 4-3
Scaling Documents 4-3
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 4-3
1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing 4-4
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs 4-5
Registering Destinations in
the Address Book 5-1
Registering Destinations in the Address Book 5-2
One-touch keys 5-2
Coded dial 5-2
Group dialing 5-2
Registering and Editing One-Touch Keys 5-3
Registering and Editing from the Operation Panel 5-3
Registering and Editing One-Touch Keys using the Remote UI 5-5
Registering and Editing Coded Dial Codes 5-6
Registering and Editing from the Operation Panel 5-6
Registering and Editing a Coded Dial Code Using the Remote UI 5-8
Registering and Editing Destinations for Group Dialing 5-9
Registering and Editing a Destination Group from
the Operation Panel 5-9
Registering
and Editing a Destination Group Using the Remote UI
5-12
Using the Fax Functions
(D1370/D1350 Only) 6-1
Basic Procedures for Sending Faxes 6-2
Changing the Scan Settings (Fax) 6-3
Resolution Settings 6-3
Density Settings 6-3
2-Sided Original 6-3
Sharpness Settings 6-3
Specifying Destinations 6-4
Specifying destinations by entering the fax number 6-4
Specifying destinations using one-touch keys 6-4
Specifying destinations using coded dial codes 6-4
Specifying destinations using group addresses 6-5
Specifying destinations using the address book 6-5
Canceling Fax Jobs 6-6
Redialing (Manual Redialing) 6-7
Useful Features 6-8
Notifying the Recipient of an Incoming Fax by Telephone
(Manual Sending) 6-8
Push-button Telephone for Tone Dialing 6-8
Sending a Fax Abroad (Adding Pauses) 6-9
Sending to Multiple Destinations at a Time
(Sequential Broadcast) 6-10
RX Mode 6-11
RX Mode 6-11
Auto mode 6-11
Fax/Tel mode 6-12
Answer mode 6-13
Manual mode 6-13
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) mode 6-13
Changing the Receive Mode 6-14
Advanced Settings for the Fax/Tel Auto Switch Mode 6-14
Forwarding Fax Documents 6-15
Setting Document Transfer (Automatic Forwarding) 6-15
Forwarding Received Faxes Stored in Memory to
Other Destinations (Manual Forwarding) 6-15
Configurating Operations for Transfer Errors 6-16
Re-fowarding/Printing/Deleting Documents in
Which Transfer Is Failed 6-17
Managing Faxes Stored in Memory 6-18
Checking and Canceling Fax Jobs 6-18
Combining and Printing the Received Documents You Saved 6-18
Checking and Deleting Received Faxes 6-19
Checking the History of Received/Sent Faxes 6-20
Changing the Default Fax Settings 6-21
Changing Fax Settings
(Settings that Can Be Specified Using the [Menu] Button)
6-22
The steps to take for configuring the send settings 6-22
Options 6-22
Register Unit Telephone Number 6-23
Select Line Type 6-23
Off-Hook Alarm 6-23
Change Defaults 6-23
Register Unit Name (Fax) 6-23
ECM TX 6-23
Pause Time 6-23
Auto Redial 6-24
Sender ID 6-24
Check Dial Tone Before Sending 6-24
The steps to take for configuring the receiving settings 6-24
Options 6-25
ECM RX 6-25
Incoming Ring 6-25
Remote RX 6-25
Auto RX Switch 6-25
2-Sided Printing 6-25
Reduce RX Size 6-26
RX Page Footer 6-26
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low 6-26
The steps to take for configuring the system settings 6-26
Options 6-27
TX Start Speed 6-27
RX Start Speed 6-27
Memory Lock Settings 6-27
Select Country/Region 6-27
Address Book PIN 6-27
Restrict New Destinations 6-28
Allow Fax Driver TX 6-28
Restrict History TX 6-28
Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry 6-28
One-TouchCoded Dial TX Confirmation 6-28
Restrict Sequential Broadcast 6-28
x
Using the Scan Functions 7-1
Basic Scan Operations 7-2
Scanning Using Keys on the Operation Panel 7-2
Saving Scanned Documents to USB Memory Device 7-4
E-mailing Scanned Documents (D1370 Only) 7-5
Sending Scanned Documents to a File Server (D1370 Only) 7-6
Maintenance 8-1
Cleaning the Machine 8-2
Cleaning the Exterior 8-2
Cleaning the Fixing Unit 8-2
Cleaning the Platen Glass 8-3
Cleaning the Feeder 8-3
Cleaning the Feeder Automatically 8-3
Precautions When Cleaning the Machine 8-4
Replacing Toner Cartridges 8-5
When a Message Appears (D1370/D1350 Only) 8-5
When White Streaks Appear on the Output or
the Output Is Partially Faded 8-5
Supplied Toner Cartridge 8-6
About Replacement Toner Cartridge 8-6
Handling Toner Cartridge 8-6
Storing Toner Cartridges 8-7
Using the Toner Saver Mode 8-7
Purchasing Consumables 8-7
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge 8-8
Replacing the Toner Cartridge 8-8
Precautions When Replacing Toner Cartridge 8-9
Recycling Used Cartridges 8-11
The Clean Earth Campaign 8-11
U.S.A. PROGRAM 8-11
Packaging 8-11
Shipping 8-12
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME 8-13
Relocating the Machine 8-14
Precautions When Relocating the Machine 8-15
Troubleshooting 9-1
Clearing Jams 9-2
Document Jams in the Feeder 9-2
Paper Jams in the Output Area 9-4
Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray 9-4
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer (Drawer 1 or 2) 9-4
Paper Jams in the Back Cover and Duplex Unit 9-5
Paper Jams in the Front Cover 9-5
Paper Jams in the 2-sided Transport Guide 9-6
Onscreen Message 9-8
Error Codes 9-9
When <Incorrect Size/Setting> Appears 9-12
Troubleshooting 9-13
Check the Following First 9-13
Is the power switched ON? 9-13
Has the power switch been just turned ON? 9-13
Is the machine in the sleep mode? 9-13
Are the settings properly configured? 9-13
Is the Error indicator on or blinking? 9-13
Does a message appear on the screen? 9-14
Is the telephone line connected or configured properly?
(D1370/D1350 Only) 9-14
If You Cannot Solve a Problem 9-14
When a Power Failure Occurs 9-15
Printing Results Are Not Good 9-16
Paper Curls 9-16
Paper Creases 9-17
Vertical Streaks Appear on the Output 9-18
Toner Smudges and Spatters Appear around Text and Images 9-19
The Bottom Edge of Paper or
Following Paper Has Smudge Marks 9-19
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed 9-20
When a Problem Cannot Be Resolved 9-21
Customer Support (U.S.A.) 9-21
Customer Support (Canada) 9-21
Registering/Setting the Various Functions
10-1
Setting Menu List 10-2
Printing a User Data List 10-2
Contents of the Setting Menu 10-2
Appendix 11-1
Main Specifications 11-2
Machine Specifications 11-2
Copy Specifications 11-2
Printer Specification 11-2
Scanner Specifications 11-3
Fax Specifications (D1370/D1350 Only) 11-3
Telephone Specifications (D1370/D1350 Only) 11-3
Transmission Specification (D1370 Only) 11-3
Optional Drawer 11-3
For Macintosh Users 11-4
Displaying Driver Guides 11-4
Displaying a Driver’s Help System 11-4
Content of the e-Manual about Features that
Are Unavailable on the Macintosh 11-4
Index 11-5
xi
Manuals for the Machine
Starter Guide
Read this manual first.
This manual describes the settings for
setting up the machine and installing
the software. Be sure to read this
manual before using the machine.
• Preface
• Installing the Machine
• Configuring and Connecting the Fax
• Connecting to a Computer and Installing the Drivers
• Appendix
Basic Operation Guide
Read this manual next.
This manual describes the basic use of
the machine.
• Before Using the Machine
• Document and Paper Handling
• Copying
• Printing from a Computer
• Registering Destinations in the
Address Book
• Using the Fax Functions
• Using the Scan Functions
• Maintenance
• Troubleshooting
• Registering/Setting
• Functions
• Appendix
This manual
e-Manual
Read the desired chapter
to suit your needs.
The e-Manual is categorized by subject
to find desired information easily.
• Important Safety
Instructions
• Basic Operation
• Copy*1
• Fax*1
• Print*1
• Scan
• Network Settings
* The e-Manual is included in the User Software CD-ROM.
• Security
• Setting and Managing
from Computer
• Troubleshooting
• Maintenance
• Setting Menu List
• Specifications
*1 If you are using Macintosh, see the following Driver Guides or Help for more details on these
functions.
You can find the driver guides in the following locations on the User Software CD-ROM.
• Canon MF Printer Driver Guide → [Documents] - [english] - [Print] - [Guide] - [index.html]
• Canon PS Printer Driver Guide → [Documents] - [english] - [Print(PS)] - [Guide] - [index.
html]
• Canon Fax Driver Guide → [Documents] - [english] - [FAX] - [Guide] - [index.html]
• Canon Scanner Driver Guide → [Documents] - [english] - [Scan] - [Guide] - [index.html]
Send Setting Guide (D1370 only)
Read this manual for how
to set Send features.
This manual describes setting for
sending scanned data to E-mail and/or
file servers.
• Send to E-mail Function
• Store to Shared Folder Function
* The Send Setting Guide is included in
the User Software CD-ROM.
MF Driver Installation Guide
Read this manual when
installing the software.
• Before Using the Driver
• Installing the MF Drivers
and MF Toolbox
• Installing the MF Drivers
on the WSD Network
• Uninstalling the Software
• Troubleshooting
• How to Use the Online Help
• Confirming IP Address
Settings
• How to Check the Bit
Architecture
* The MF Driver Installation Guide is
included in the User Software CD-ROM.
xii
Available Features
The machine offers the following features.
○ : available
— : not available
Copy
(2-sided)
Print
(2-sided)
Print
(PS/PCL)
Fax
(PC Fax) Scan
Send to Email
/
Store to
Shared Folder
Remote
UI
ADF
(2-sided)
D1370 ○○○○○○○○
D1350 ○○—○○—○ ○
D1320 ○○——○—○ ○
xiii
Symbols Used in This Manual
WARNING
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons if not performed correctly. To
use the machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings.
CAUTION
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if not performed correctly. To use the
machine safely, always pay attention to these cautions.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine
correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or property.
NOTE
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is
highly recommended.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully, and make sure not to perform the
described operations.
Keys and Buttons Used in This Manual
The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are expressed in this manual.
• Operation panel keys: [Key icon] + (Key name)
Example: [ ] (Stop)
• Display: <Specify destination.>
• Buttons and items on the computer display: [Preferences]
Illustrations Used in This Manual
Illustrations used in this manual
Illustrations of the model D1370 are used in this manual. When there is any difference among
the machines, it is clearly indicated in the text, e.g., “D1320.”
For information on the standard features for each model, see the followings.
“Available Features” (→P. xii)
Displays used in this manual
The display used in this manual is the factory preset display for the D1370. Depending on the system configuration and product
purchased, the appearance of the display may differ.
How to Use This Manual
xiv
Important Safety Instructions
Please read these “Important Safety Instructions” thoroughly before operating the machine.
As these instructions are intended to prevent injury to the user and other persons or to prevent destruction of property, always pay
attention to these instructions and operational requirements.
Also, as it may result in unexpected accidents or injuries, do not perform any operation unless otherwise specified in the manual.
Installation
WARNING
• Do not install the machine in a location near alcohol, paint
thinner, or other flammable substances. If flammable
substances come into contact with electrical parts inside
the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not place the following items on the machine.
- Necklaces and other metal objects
- Cups, vases, flowerpots, and other containers filled with
water or liquids
If these items come into contact with a high-voltage area
inside the machine, this may result in a fire or electrical
shock. If these items are dropped or spilled inside the
machine, immediately turn off the power switches of the
machine and computer (1) and disconnect the interface
cable if it is connected (2). Then, unplug the power plug
from the AC power outlet (3) and contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
(2)
(2)
(2)
(3)
OFF
(1)
(3)
OFF
ON
(1)
• Do not use this product near any medical electric
equipments. Radiowave emitted from this product may
influence those medical electric equipments. This may
result in accidents caused by malfunction.
CAUTION
• Do not install the machine in unstable locations, such as on
unsteady platforms or inclined floors, or in locations subject
to excessive vibrations, as this may cause the machine to fall
or tip over, resulting in personal injury.
• The ventilation slots are provided for proper ventilation of
working parts inside the machine. Never place the machine
on a soft surface, such as a bed, sofa, or rug. Blocking the
slots can cause the machine to overheat, resulting in a fire.
• Do not install the machine in the following locations, as this
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
- A damp or dusty location
- A location exposed to smoke and steam, such as near a
cookery or humidifier
- A location exposed to rain or snow
- A location near a water faucet or water
- A location exposed to direct sunlight
- A location subject to high temperatures
- A location near open flames
• When installing the machine, gently lower the machine to
the installation site so as not to catch your hands between
the machine and the floor or between the machine and
other equipment, as this may result in personal injury.
• When connecting the interface cable, connect it properly by
following the instructions in this manual. If not connected
properly, this may result in malfunction or electrical shock.
• When moving the machine, follow the instructions in this
manual to hold it correctly. Failure to do so may cause you
to drop the machine, resulting in personal injury.
“Relocating the Machine” (→P. 8-14)
• Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when
used at high altitudes of about 3,000 meters above sea
level, or higher.
Power Supply
WARNING
• Do not damage or modify the power cord. Also, do not
place heavy objects on the power cord or pull on or
excessively bend it. This can cause electrical damage,
resulting in fire or electrical shock.
• Keep the power cord away from all heat sources. Failure to
do so can cause the power cord insulation to melt, resulting
in a fire or electrical shock.
• The power cord should not be taut, as this may lead to a
loose connection and cause overheating, which could result
in a fire.
• The power cord may become damaged if it is stepped on,
fixed with staples, or if heavy objects are placed on it.
Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to an
accident, such as a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not plug or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as
this can result in electrical shock.
• Do not plug the power cord into a multiplug power strip, as
this can result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Do not bundle up or tie up the power cord in a knot, as this
can result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet.
Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock.
• If excessive stress is applied to the connection part of the
power cord, it may damage the power cord or the wires
inside the machine may disconnect. This could result in a
fire. Avoid the following situations:
- Connecting and disconnecting the power cord
frequently.
xv
- Tripping over the power cord.
- The power cord is bent near the connection part, and
continuous stress is being applied to the power outlet or
the connection part.
- Applying a shock to the power connector.
• Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as
this can result in a fire or electrical shock.
• As a general rule, do not use extension cords. Using an
extension cord may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Remove the power plug from the AC power outlet
and refrain from using the machine during a thunder
storm. Lightening can result in a fire, electrical shock or
malfunction.
CAUTION
• Do not use a power supply voltage other than that listed
herein, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Always grasp the power plug when unplugging the power
plug. Do not pull on the power cord, as this may expose the
core wire of the power cord or damage the cord insulation,
causing electricity to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can
be unplugged easily. If objects are placed around the power
plug, you may be unable to unplug it in an emergency.
Handling
WARNING
• Do not disassemble or modify the machine. There are
high-temperature and high-voltage components inside the
machine which may result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Electrical equipment can be hazardous if not used properly.
Do not allow children to touch the power cord, cables,
internal gears, or electrical parts.
• If the machine makes an unusual noise or emits smoke,
heat, or an unusual smell, immediately turn off the power
switches of the machine and computer and disconnect the
interface cable if it is connected. Then, unplug the power
plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local
authorized Canon dealer. Continued use can result in a fire
or electrical shock.
• Do not use flammable sprays near the machine. If
flammable substances come into contact with electrical
parts inside the machine, this may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
• Always turn off the power switches of the machine and
computer, and then unplug the power plug and interface
cables before moving the machine. Failure to do so can
damage the cables or cords, resulting in a fire or electrical
shock.
• Confirm that the power plug or power connector is inserted
completely after moving the machine. Failure to do so can
result in an overheating and fire.
• Do not drop paper clips, staples, or other metal objects
inside the machine. Also, do not spill water, liquids, or other
flammable substances (alcohol, benzene, paint thinner,
etc.) inside the machine. If these items come into contact
with a high-voltage area inside the machine, this may result
in a fire or electrical shock. If these items are dropped or
spilled inside the machine, immediately turn off the power
switches of the machine and computer and disconnect the
interface cable if it is connected. Then, unplug the power
plug from the AC power outlet and contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
• When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power
plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not touch the
metal part of the connector, as this can result in electrical
shock.
CAUTION
• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. The object or
the machine may fall, resulting in personal injury.
• Turn off the power switch when the machine will not be
used for a long period of time, such as overnight. Turn off
the machine and unplug the power plug if the machine
will not be used for an extended period of time, such as for
several days.
• Open or close covers and install or remove drawers gently
and carefully. Be careful not to hurt your fingers.
• Keep your hands and clothing away from the roller in the
output area. Even if the machine is not printing, the roller
may suddenly rotate and catch your hands or clothing,
resulting in personal injury.
• The output slot is hot during and immediately after
printing. Do not touch the area surrounding the output slot,
as this may result in burns.
• Printed paper may be hot immediately after being output.
Be careful when removing the paper and aligning the
removed paper, especially after continuous printing. Failure
to do so may result in burns.
• When performing copy with a thick book placed on the
platen glass, do not press the feeder forcefully. This may
damage the platen glass and cause personal injury.
• Be careful not to drop a heavy object, such as a dictionary,
on the platen glass. This may damage the platen glass and
cause personal injury.
• Close the feeder gently so as not to catch your hand. This
may result in personal injury.
• The laser beam can be harmful to the human body. The
laser beam is confined in the laser scanner unit by a cover,
so there is no danger of the laser beam escaping during
normal machine operation. Read the following remarks and
instructions for safety.
- Never open covers other than those indicated in this
manual.
- Do not remove the caution label attached to the cover of
the laser scanner unit.
- If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes,
exposure may cause damage to your eyes.
• If you operate this machine in manners other than the
control, adjustment, and operating procedures prescribed
in this manual, this may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
• This machine is confirmed as the class 1 laser product in
IEC60825-1:2007.
xvi
Maintenance and Inspections
WARNING
• When cleaning the machine, turn off the machine and
computer, and unplug the interface cables and power plug.
Failure to do so can result in a fire or electrical shock.
• Unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet
periodically and clean the area around the base of the
power plug’s metal pins and the AC power outlet with a
dry cloth to remove all dust and grime. In damp, dusty,
or smoky locations, dust can build up around the power
plug and become damp, which can cause a short circuit,
resulting in a fire.
• Clean the machine with a well wrung out cloth dampened
with water or mild detergent diluted with water. Do not
use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other flammable
substances. If flammable substances come into contact
with electrical parts inside the machine, this may result in a
fire or electrical shock.
• Some areas inside the machine are subject to high voltage.
When removing jammed paper or when inspecting inside
of the machine, be careful not to allow necklaces, bracelets,
or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine,
as this can result in burns or electrical shock.
• Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames.
This may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to
ignite, resulting in burns or fire.
• If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the
toner particles together or wipe them up with a soft, damp
cloth in a way that prevents inhalation.
Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have safeguards
against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing so
may cause a malfunction in the vacuum cleaner, or result in
a dust explosion due to static discharge.
• Confirm that the power plug or power connector is inserted
completely after cleaning the machine. Failure to do so can
result in an overheating and fire.
• Check the power cord and plug regularly. The following
conditions may result in fire, so please contact your local
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
- There are burn marks on the power plug.
- The blade on the power plug is deformed or broken.
- The power is turned OFF or ON when bending the power
cord.
- The coating of the power cord is damaged, cracked, or
dented.
- A part of the power cord becomes hot.
• Check regularly that the power cord and plug are not
handled in the following manner. Failure to do so can result
in a fire or electrical shock.
- The power connector is loosened.
- Stress is being applied to the power cord by a heavy
object or by fixing it with staples.
- The power plug is loosened.
- The power cord is tied in a bundle.
- A part of the power cord is put in an aisle.
- The power cord is put in front of the heating appliance.
CAUTION
• The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine
become hot during use. When removing jammed paper or
when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch
the fixing unit and its surroundings, as this may result in
burns.
• When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the
inside of the machine, do not expose yourself to the heat
emitted from the fixing unit and its surroundings for a
prolonged period of time. Doing so may result in low
temperature burns, even though you did not touch the
fixing unit and its surroundings directly, as this may result
in burns.
• If paper is jammed, remove the jammed paper so that
any pieces of paper do not remain inside the machine
according to the displayed message. Also, do not put your
hand in an area other than indicated areas, as this may
result in personal injuries or burns.
• When removing jammed paper or replacing a toner
cartridge, be careful not to get any toner on your hands or
clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If toner
gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately
with cold water. Washing with warm water sets the toner,
making it impossible to remove the toner stains.
• When removing jammed paper, be careful not to allow the
toner on the paper to scatter. The toner may get into your
eyes or mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash
them immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
• When loading paper or removing jammed documents or
paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of
the paper.
• When removing a toner cartridge, remove the toner
cartridge carefully so as to prevent the toner from
scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If toner gets
into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold
water and consult a physician.
• Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge. The
toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner
gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with
cold water and consult a physician.
• If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to
inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with
your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin,
wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale
the toner, consult a physician immediately.
xvii
Consumables
WARNING
• Do not dispose of used toner cartridges in open flames. This
may cause the toner to ignite, resulting in burns or fire.
• Do not store toner cartridges or paper in a location exposed
to open flames. This may cause the toner or paper to ignite,
resulting in burns or fire.
• When disposing of a toner cartridge, place the toner
cartridge into a bag to prevent the toner from scattering,
and then dispose of the toner cartridge according to local
regulations.
• If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the
toner particles together or wipe them up with a soft, damp
cloth in a way that prevents inhalation.
Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have safeguards
against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing so
may cause a malfunction in the vacuum cleaner, or result in
a dust explosion due to static discharge.
CAUTION
• Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of
the reach of small children. If the toner or other parts are
ingested, consult a physician immediately.
• Do not attempt to disassemble the toner cartridge. The
toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If toner
gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with
cold water and consult a physician.
• If toner leaks from the toner cartridge, be careful not to
inhale the toner or allow it to come into direct contact with
your skin. If the toner comes into contact with your skin,
wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated or you inhale
the toner, consult a physician immediately.
• Do not pull out the sealing tape forcefully or stop at
midpoint, as this may cause toner to spill out. If toner gets
into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold
water and consult a physician.
Others
WARNING
• If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
This machine generates a low level magnetic field. If you
use a cardiac pacemaker and feel abnormalities, please
move away from this machine and consult your physician
immediately.
Telephone Equipment
When using telephone equipment, basic safety precautions
should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric
shock, and injury to persons, including the following:
1. Do not use this machine near water (i.e., near a bathtub,
kitchen sink, or laundry tub), or in a wet basement or near a
swimming pool.
2. Avoid using the telephone during an electrical storm, as
there may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
3. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity
of the leak.
xviii
Installation Requirements and Handling
In order to use this machine in a safe and trouble-free manner, install the machine in a place that fulfills the following conditions.
Also, read the remarks carefully.
Temperature and Humidity Conditions
• Temperature range: 50 to 86°F (10 to 30°C)
• Humidity range: 20 to 80 % RH (no condensation)
IMPORTANT
Protecting the machine from condensation
• To prevent condensation from forming inside the machine
in the following cases, let the machine adjust to the
ambient temperature and humidity for at least two hours
before use.
- When the room where the machine is installed is heated
rapidly
- When the machine is moved from a cool or dry location
to a hot or humid location
• If water droplets (condensation) form inside the machine,
this can result in paper jams or poor print quality.
When using an ultrasonic humidifier
When you are using an ultrasonic humidifier, it is therefore
recommended that you use purified water or other water that
is free of impurities.
If you use tap water or well water, impurities in the water will
be dispersed through the air. This can be trapped inside the
machine, causing degradation in print quality.
Power Supply Requirements
120 to 127 V, 60 Hz
IMPORTANT
Precautions when connecting the power cord
• Do not connect this machine to an uninterruptible power
source.
• Use an AC power outlet exclusively for the machine. Do not
use the other sockets of the AC power outlet.
• Do not plug the power plug into the auxiliary outlet on a
computer.
Do not use the same AC power outlet for both the machine
and any of the following equipment.
- Copy machine
- Air conditioner
- Shredder
- Equipment that consumes a large amount of electricity
- Equipment that generates electrical noise
• When unplugging the power cord, keep interval of 5
seconds or more before plugging it again.
Miscellaneous precautions
• The maximum power consumption of the machine is
1,100 W or less.
• Electrical noise or a dramatic drop in supplied voltage may
cause the machine or computer to operate incorrectly or
lose data.
Installation Requirements
• A location with sufficient space
• A location with good ventilation
• A location with a flat, even surface
• A location able to fully support the weight of the machine
IMPORTANT
Do not install the machine in the following locations, as
this may result in damage to the machine.
• A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or
humidity
• A location subject to condensation
• A poorly ventilated location
(If you use the machine for a long time or to perform a large
amount of printing in a poorly ventilated room, the ozone
or other odors generated by the machine may create an
uncomfortable working environment. In addition, chemical
particles are dispersed during printing; therefore, it is
important to provide adequate ventilation.)
• A location near equipment that generates magnetic or
electromagnetic waves
• A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur
• A location exposed to salt air, corrosive gases, or toxic gases
• A location, such as on a carpet or mat, that may warp from
the weight of the machine or where the machine is liable
to sink.
Installation Space
Required installation space
32 1/2"
(824 mm)
52 3/4" (1,341 mm)
25 5/8"
(650 mm)
4" (100 mm) 4" (100 mm)
4" (100 mm)
4" (100 mm)
4" (100 mm)
xix
Maintenance and Inspections
IMPORTANT
• Follow the instructions in the caution label attached to this
machine.
• Avoid shaking or applying a shock to this machine.
• To prevent a paper jam, do not turn the power ON/OFF,
open/close the operation panel or rear cover, and load/
unload paper in the middle of printing operation.
• Be sure to remove the toner cartridge from the machine
when transporting the machine to a distance.
• To avoid exposing the toner cartridge to light, place it in the
protective bag included with this machine or wrap it in a
thick cloth.
• Clean this machine regularly. If this machine becomes
dusty, it may operate improperly.
• Use a modular cable of 3 m or shorter in length.
• Depending on your locale or your telephone connection,
you may be unable to perform data communication. In this
case, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the
Canon help line.
• The repairing parts and toner cartridges for the machine
will be available for at least seven (7) years after production
of this machine model has been discontinued.
Customer Support
Customer Support (U.S.A.)
Your machine is designed with the latest technology to
provide trouble-free operation. If you encounter a problem
with the machine’s operation, try to solve it by using the
information in Chapter 9. If you cannot solve the problem
or if you think your machine needs servicing, contact Canon
Customer Care Center at 1-800-OK-CANON between the hours
of 8:00 A.M. to 8:00 P.M. EST Monday through Friday. On-line
support for 24 hours is also available at the website.
http://www.canontechsupport.com/
Customer Support (Canada)
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical
support options*:
• For step-by-step troubleshooting, e-mail technical support,
the latest driver or document downloads, and answers to
frequently asked questions, visit http://www.canon.ca/
• Free live technical support 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST Monday
through Friday (excluding holidays) for products still under
warranty 1-800-OK-CANON
• For the location of the authorized service facility nearest
you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or 1-800-OK-CANON
• If the problem cannot be corrected by using one of the
above technical support options, repair options are
available at the time of your call to the live technical
support number above or via the website at
http://www.canon.ca/
* Support program specifics are subject to change without notice.
xx
Legal Notices
International ENERGY STAR Program
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Canon U.S.A., Inc. has
determined that this product meets the ENERGY
STAR Program for energy efficiency.
The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment
Program is an international program that promotes
energy saving through the use of computers and
other office equipment.
The program backs the development and
dissemination of products with functions that
effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an
open system in which business proprietors can
participate voluntarily.
The targeted products are office equipment, such
as computers, displays, printers, facsimiles, and
copiers. The standards and logos are uniform
among participating nations.
IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has
obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1 established
by the IPv6 Forum.
Trademarks
Canon, the Canon logo, and imageCLASS are registered
trademarks of Canon Inc. in the United States and may also be
trademarks or registered trademarks in other countries.
Apple, Mac OS, and Macintosh are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Apple Inc. in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista and Windows Server
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or
UFST under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc. UFST is a
trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United
States Patent and Trademark Office and may be registered in
certain jurisdictions.
UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all
rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks,
trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
Copyright
Copyright CANON INC. 2013
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any
language or computer language in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical, chemical, manual, or
otherwise, without the prior written permission of Canon Inc.
Third Party Software
This Canon product (the “PRODUCT”) includes third-party
software modules. Use and distribution of these software
modules (the “SOFTWARE”) are subject to the conditions
below.
(1) You agree that you will comply with any applicable export
control laws, restrictions or regulations of the countries
involved in the event that this product including the
SOFTWARE is shipped, transferred or exported into any
country.
(2) Rights holders of the SOFTWARE retain in all respects the
title, ownership and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE. Except as expressly provided herein, no
license or right, expressed or implied, is hereby conveyed or
granted by rights holders of the SOFTWARE to you for any
intellectual property of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.
(3) You may use the SOFTWARE solely for use with the
PRODUCT.
(4) You may not assign, sublicense, market, distribute, or
transfer the SOFTWARE to any third party without prior
written consent of rights holders of the SOFTWARE.
(5) Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may transfer the
SOFTWARE only when (a) you assign to a transferee all of
your rights to the PRODUCT and all rights and obligations
under the conditions governing the SOFTWARE and
PRODUCT and (b) such transferee agrees in writing to be
bound by all these conditions.
(6) You may not decrypt, decompile, reverse engineer,
disassemble or otherwise reduce the code of the
SOFTWARE to human readable form.
(7) You may not modify, adapt, translate, rent, lease or loan
the SOFTWARE or create derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE.
(8) You are not entitled to remove or make separate copies of
the SOFTWARE from the PRODUCT.
(9) The human-readable portion (the source code) of the
SOFTWARE is not licensed to you.
Notwithstanding (1) through (9) above, in case any other
license conditions accompany third-party software modules,
these software modules are subject to these other conditions,
as well.
ACCEPTANCE
THE TERMS OF THIS THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE STATED HERE
OR IN RELATED WARRANTY PROVISIONS SHALL BE DEEMED
ACCEPTED UPON YOUR USE OF THE PRODUCT FOR ONE OR
MORE OF ITS NORMAL PURPOSES, IF THERE HAS BEEN NO
OTHER PRIOR EXPRESS ACCEPTANCE.
THE TERMS OF THIS THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE GOVERN THE
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE AS DELIVERED WITH THE PRODUCT
AND ALL UPDATED VERSIONS OF THE THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
PROVIDED UNDER MAINTENANCE AGREEMENTS OR OTHER
SERVICE ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE PRODUCT WITH CANON
USA OR CANON CANADA OR THEIR RESPECTIVE AUTHORIZED
SERVICE ORGANIZATIONS.
The Software Subjected to Other Conditions
Please refer to e-Manual on a CD-ROM bundled with this
product, for more detail and corresponding license conditions.
® ®
xxi
Disclaimers
The information in this document is subject to change without
notice.
CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH
REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
OF USE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR EXPENSES
RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
For CA, USA only
Included battery contains Perchlorate Material - special
handling may apply.
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for
details.
Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce
certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned,
printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be
prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil
liability.
A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below.
This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are uncertain
about the legality of using your product to scan, print or
otherwise reproduce any particular document, and/or of the
use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced,
you should consult in advance with your legal advisor for
guidance.
• Paper Money
• Money Orders
• Certificates of Deposit
• Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• Identifying Badges or Insignias
• Selective Service or Draft Papers
• Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies
• Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title
• Travelers Checks
• Food Stamps
• Passports
• Immigration Papers
• Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• Bonds or Other Certificates of Indebtedness
• Stock Certificates
• Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of
Copyright Owner
FCC (Federal Communications Commission)
imageCLASS D1370: F161402
imageCLASS D1350: F161402
imageCLASS D1320: F161400
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
• Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with class B limits
in Subpart B of Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Do not make any
changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise
specified in this manual. If you make such changes or
modifications, you could be required to stop operation of the
equipment.
Canon U.S.A., Inc.
One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.
TEL No. 1-800-OK-CANON
Users in the U.S.A.
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine.
See Chapter 11, “Appendix,” for specific dimensions and
weight.
B. Order Information
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be
used.
2. Order an RJ11-C telephone wall jack (USOC), which
should be installed by the telephone company. If the
RJ11-C wall jack is not present, telephone/facsimile
operation is not possible.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone
company’s business representative. The line should be
a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one
line per unit.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
-or-
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you
communicate overseas
NOTE
Canon recommends an individual line following industry
standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial)
telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch
eXchange) unit without “Call Waiting” can be used with your
facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended
because they send nonstandard signals to individual
telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a
facsimile error.
xxii
C. Power Requirements
The machine should be connected to a standard 120 volt
AC, three-wire grounded outlet only.
Do not connect this machine to an outlet or power line
shared with other appliances that cause “electrical noise.” Air
conditioners, electric typewriters, copiers, and machines of
this sort generate electrical noise that often interferes with
communications equipment and the sending and receiving
of documents.
Connection of the Equipment
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the
requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear panel of this
equipment is a label that contains, among other information,
a product identifier in the format of US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If
requested, this number must be provided to the telephone
company.
The REN (Ringer Equivalence Number) is used to determine the
number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line.
Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices
not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all
areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0).
To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected
to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local
telephone company. The REN for this product is part of the
product identifier that has the format US: AAAEQ##TXXXX. The
digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point
(e.g., 10 is a REN of 1.0).
An FCC compliant telephone line cable and modular plug is
provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed
to be connected to the telephone network or premise wiring
using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant.
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by
the telephone company. Connection to party lines is subjected
to state tariffs.
In Case of Equipment Malfunction
Should any malfunction occur which cannot be corrected
by the procedures described in this guide or the e-Manual,
disconnect the equipment from the telephone line cable and
disconnect the power cord.
The telephone line cable should not be reconnected or the
power switch turned ON until the problem is completely
resolved. Users should contact Canon Authorized Service
Facilities for servicing of equipment, Information regarding
Authorized Service Facility locations can be obtained by calling
Canon Customer Care Center (1-800-OK-CANON).
Rights of the Telephone Company
If this equipment (imageCLASS D1370/D1350/D1320) causes
harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may
temporarily disconnect service. The telephone company also
retains the right to make changes in facilities and services
that may affect the operation of this equipment. When such
changes are necessary, the telephone company is required to
give adequate prior notice to the user.
However, if advance notice is not possible, the telephone
company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also,
the customer will be advised of his/her right to file a complaint
with the FCC if he/she believes it is necessary.
WARNING
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it
unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless
such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the
transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the
message and the telephone number of the sending machine
or such business, other entity, or individual.
(The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number
or any other number for which charges exceed local or long-
distance transmission charges.)
NOTE
In order to program this information into your machine, you
should complete the procedure for registering your name,
unit’s telephone number, time, and date in the Starter Guide.
Users in Canada
Pre-Installation Requirements for Canon Facsimile Equipment
A. Location
Supply a suitable table, cabinet, or desk for the machine.
See Chapter 11, “Appendix,” for specific dimensions and
weight.
B. Order Information
1. A single telephone line (touch-tone or rotary) should be
used.
2. Order a CA11A modular jack, which should be installed
by the telephone company. If the CA11A jack is not
present, installation cannot occur.
3. Order a normal business line from your telephone
company’s business representative. The line should be
a regular voice grade line or an equivalent one. Use one
line per unit.
DDD (Direct Distance Dial) line
-or-
IDDD (International Direct Distance Dial) line if you
communicate overseas
NOTE
Canon recommends an individual line following industry
standards, i.e., 2,500 (touch-tone) or 500 (rotary/pulse dial)
telephones. A dedicated extension off a PBX (Private Branch
eXchange) unit without “Call Waiting” can be used with your
facsimile unit. Key telephone systems are not recommended
because they send nonstandard signals to individual
telephones for ringing and special codes, which may cause a
facsimile error.
C. Power Requirements
The power outlet should be a three-prong grounded
receptacle (Single or Duplex). It should be independent
xxiii
from copiers, heaters, air conditioners, or any electric
equipment that is thermostatically controlled. The rated
value is 115 volts and 15 amperes. The CA11A modular jack
should be relatively close to the power outlet to facilitate
installation.
Notice
• This product meets the applicable Industry Canada
technical specifications.
• The Ringer Equivalence Number is an indication of the
maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to
a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may
consist of any combination of devices subject only to the
requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices
does not exceed five.
• The REN of this product is 1.0.
• Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that
it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local
telecommunications company. The equipment must also
be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In
some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a
single line individual service may be extended by means of
a certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord).
The customer should be aware that compliance with the
above conditions may not prevent deterioration of service
in some situations.
• Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an
authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by
the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to
this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to
disconnect the equipment.
• Users should ensure for their own protection that the
electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if
present, are connected together. This precaution may be
particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION
Users should not attempt to make such connections
themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric
inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate.
NOTE
This equipment complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B
limits.
Utilisation au Canada
Conditions à Remplir Préalablement à L’installation d’un
Télécopieur Canon
A. Emplacement
Prévoir une table, un meuble, ou un bureau suffisamment
solide et de taille appropriée (voir le chapitre 11, Annexe
(Appendix), pour les indications de poids et dimensions).
B. Installation téléphonique
1. Une seule ligne téléphonique (tonalités ou impulsions)
doit être utilisée.
2. Il faut commander un jack modulaire CA11A qui sera
installé par la compagnie téléphonique. Sans ce jack, la
mise en place serait impossible.
3. Si vous vous abonnez à une nouvelle ligne, demandez
une ligne d’affaires normale de qualité téléphonique
courante ou équivalente. Prenez un abonnement d’une
ligne par appareil.
Ligne automatique interurbaine
ou
Ligne automatique internationale (si vous communiquez
avec les pays étrangers)
NOTE
Canon vous conseille d’utiliser une ligne individuelle conforme
aux normes industrielles, à savoir:
ligne téléphonique 2,500 (pour appareil à clavier) ou 500
(pour appareil à cadran/impulsions). Il est également possible
de raccorder ce télécopieur à un système téléphonique à
poussoirs car la plupart de ces systèmes émettent des signaux
d’appel non normalisés ou des codes spéciaux qui risquent de
perturber le fonctionnement du télécopieur.
C. Condition d’alimentation
Raccordez le télécopieur à une prise de courant plus terre
à trois branches, du type simple ou double, et qui ne sert
pas à alimenter un copieur, un appareil de chauffage, un
climatiseur ou tout autre appareil électrique à thermostat.
L’alimentation doit être de 115 volts et 15 ampères. Pour
faciliter l’installation, le jack CA11A doit être assez proche
de la prise de courant.
Remarques
• Le présent matériel est conforme aux spécifications
techniques applicables d’Industrie Canada.
• Avant d’installer cet appareil, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il
est permis de le connecter à l’équipement de la compagnie
de télécommunication locale et doit installer cet appareil
en utilisant une méthode de connexion autorisée. Il se
peut qu’il faille étendre la circuiterie intérieure de la ligne
individuelle d’abonné, qui a été installée par la compagnie,
au moyen d’un jeu de connecteurs homologués (rallonge
téléphonique).
• L’attention de l’utilisateur est attirée sur le fait que le respect
des conditions mentionnées ci-dessus ne constitue pas une
garantie contre les dégradations de qualité du service dans
certaines circonstances.
• L’indice d’équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le
nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent être raccordés
à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d’une
interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque
de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme d’indices
d’équivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n’excède
pas 5.
• Le nombre d’équivalents sonnerie (REN) de ce produit est
1,0.
• Les réparations sur un appareil certifié doivent être
faites par une société d’entretien canadienne autorisée
par le Gouvernement canadien et désignée par le
fournisseur. Toute réparation ou modification que
pourrait faire I’utilisateur de cet appareil, ou tout
mauvais fonctionnement, donne à la compagnie de
télécommunication le droit de débrancher I’appareil.
• Pour sa propre protection, I’utilisateur doit s’assurer que
les prises de terre de I’appareil d’alimentation, les lignes
téléphoniques et les tuyaux métalliques internes, s’il y
en a, sont bien connectés entre eux. Cette précaution est
particulièrement importante dans les zones rurales
CAUTION
Au lieu d’essayer de faire ces branchements eux-mêmes, les
utilisateurs sont invités à faire appel à un service d’inspection
faisant autorité en matière d’électricité ou à un électricien,
selon le cas.
NOTE
Respecte les limites de la classe B de la NMB-003 du Canada.
xxiv
This machine complies with 21 CFR Chapter 1 Subchapter J as
a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health
and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety
Act of 1968. This means that the machine does not produce
hazardous radiation.
Since radiation emitted inside the machine is completely
confined within protective housings and external covers, the
laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase
of user operation.
CDRH Regulations
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the
U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations
for laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations
apply to laser products manufactured from August 1, 1976.
Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United
States.
CAUTION
Use of controls, adjustments, or performance of procedures
other than those specified in this manual may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.
The label is attached to the laser scanner machine inside the
machine and is not in a user access area.
Laser Safety
1-1
Chapter 1
Before Using the Machine
This chapter describes the features of the machine and its useful functions.
Parts and Their Functions 1-2
Front Side 1-2
Back Side 1-3
Interior 1-3
Operation Panel 1-4
FAX operation panel (D1370/D1350 Only) 1-5
LCD (Standby Mode) 1-6
Copy Mode 1-6
Fax Mode (D1370/D1350 Only) 1-6
Scan Mode 1-6
USB Direct Print Mode 1-6
Navigating the Menu 1-7
Entering the Menu Screen 1-7
Scrolling the Menu 1-7
Selecting a Menu Item 1-7
Configuring Menus Using the Navigation Keys 1-7
Returning to the Default Screen 1-8
Entering Text 1-9
Changing the Entry Mode 1-9
Entering Text, Symbols, and Numbers 1-9
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space) 1-9
Deleting text, symbols, or numbers 1-9
Setting the Sleep Timer 1-11
Setting the Current Date and Time 1-12
1-2
Before Using the Machine
This section describes the parts of the machine and their functions
Front Side
Parts and Their Functions
(1) Feeder
Used to continuously scan documents automatically.
(2) Document guides
Adjust these guides to fit the document.
(3) Document feeder tray
Place your documents on.
(4) Document delivery tray
Used to store documents returned by the feeder.
(5) Operation panel
Used to perform various tasks.
“Operation Panel” (→P. 1-4)
(6) Multi-purpose tray
You can load paper using the multi-purpose tray. Load
postcards or envelopes here.
(7) Auxiliary Tray (Multi-purpose Tray)
Pull it out and load the paper stack.
(8) Paper Guides (Multi-purpose Tray)
Adjust these guides to fit the document.
(9) Paper stopper
Prevents paper from falling from the output tray.
(10) Output tray
Printed paper such as copies, prints and faxes come out from
the output tray.
(11) Open Button
Push to open the front cover.
(12) Front Cover
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridge or clear paper
jams.
(13) Power Switch
Turns the power ON or OFF.
(14) Paper drawer
Load paper here.
(15) Cassette Feeding Unit-U1 (drawer 2)
It is an optional paper drawer.
(16) USB memory port
Used to save scanned documents in USB memory, and to print
files saved in USB memory.
(3) (4)
(5)(6)(7)
(2)(1)
(10)
(9)
(8)
(11) (12)
(15) (14)(16) (13)
1-3
Before Using the Machine
Back Side
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(1) USB port
Connect the USB cable.
(2) LAN port
Connect the LAN cable.
(3) External telephone line jack
Connect the external telephone.
(4) Telephone line jack
Connect the telephone cable.
(5) Power socket
Connect the power cord.
(6) Lower rear cover
Open this guide to clear paper jams.
(7) Sub-output tray
Printed paper is output to the sub-output tray with the
printed side facing up. Printed paper is stacked in reverse page
order. The sub-output tray is suitable for use when printing
transparencies, labels, or envelopes that curl easily, because the
printed paper remains flat when output.
(8) Back cover
Open this guide to clear paper jams.
Interior
(1) Scanning area
Used to scan documents from the feeder.
(2) Platen glass
Place your documents on.
(3) Toner guides
Used to insert the toner cartridge so that the protrusion on the
side of the toner cartridge fits into these guides.
(4) Duplex unit
Used for 2-sided printing and copying.
(5) Paper size switch lever
Used for 2-sided printing.
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
(4)(5)
1-4
Before Using the Machine
Operation Panel
D1370/D1350
(1)
[Menu] key Press to specify or register various settings.
[2-Sided] key You can set 2-sided printing.
[Select Paper] indicator Selected paper source turns on.
[Select Paper/Settings] key Press to specify the paper size and type to load in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.
(2) Mode switch keys Press to switch the mode to copy, fax, scan or USB direct print.
(3) [Reset] key Resets the settings. (Resets the copy/scan/fax/USB direct print mode.)
(4)
[Status Monitor/Cancel] key Press to check the status of jobs or cancel jobs. You can also check the status of the
network and machine.
[ ] Key Press to scroll up or to increase the value.
[ ] Key Press to scroll down or to decrease the value.
[ ] Key Press to return to the previous screen or move the cursor to the left.
Press to decrease the volume while the fax ring tone sounds.
[ ] Key Press to proceed to the next screen or move the cursor to the right.
Press to increase the volume while the fax ring tone sounds.
[OK] key Press to confirm an action or setting.
[Back] key Press to return to the previous screen.
[View Settings] key You can check the settings.
(5)
Numeric keys ([0]-[9]) Enter characters and numbers.
[*] key Press to switch the character entry mode, and press to switch between pulse and tone
dialing to send a fax.
[#] key Press to enter symbols.
[Report] key Press to manually print reports and lists. You can also specify whether to print a report
automatically.
[Energy Saver] key Press to manually set or cancel the Sleep mode. The Energy Saver indicator lights green
while in the sleep mode.
[ID] key Press to display the Department ID login window.
[Clear] key Deletes characters and numbers.
(6)
[Secure Print] key* Used for secure print.
[Stop] key Press to cancel jobs.
[Start] key Press to start copying, scanning, sending a fax or USB direct print.
(7) [Error] indicator Blinks when an error occurs.
[Processing/Data] indicator Blinks during transmission and turns on when the machine has waiting jobs.
* This key or function is available only for D1370.
(4)
(1) (2) (5) (6)
(7)
(3)
(4)
(1) (2) (5) (6)
(3) (7)
D1320
1-5
Before Using the Machine
FAX operation panel (D1370/D1350 Only)
(1) [One-touch Speed Dial] keys Press to select destinations registered in one-touch keys.
(2) [Address Book] key Searches recipients registered under one-touch keys or coded dial codes.
(3) [Coded Dial] key Specifies recipients registered.
(4) [Recall] key Redial the last number called. (Only enabled when the mode screens for fax, e-mail or file
server operations are displayed.)
(5) [Hook] key Press when you want to dial without lifting up the handset of the external telephone.
(6) [Pause] key Press to insert a pause in the fax number.
(1) (5)(6) (4)
(2)
(1) (3)
1-6
Before Using the Machine
LCD (Standby Mode)
This section describes the following screens.
• Copy Mode
• Fax Mode (D1370/D1350 Only)
• Scan Mode
• USB Direct Print Mode
NOTE
To change standby display
• You can change the standby display that appears when the
power switch is turned ON.
e-Manual → Basic Operation → Customizing Display
Settings → Setting the Default Screen
• When the machine is idle for 2 minutes, the screen returns to the
standby display.
e-Manual → Basic Operation → Customizing Timer Settings
→ Setting the Auto Reset Timer
Copy Mode
Press [ ] to switch to the copy mode screen.
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Density: 0
Original Type: Text
...
2-Sided: Off
1
+
-
1
When the copy mode screen is displayed, you can make
your selection by using [ ] or [ ].
The currently selected menu item is highlighted. Press [OK]
to proceed to the next screen.
11
+
-
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Density: 0
Original Type: Text
...
2-Sided: Off
Fax Mode (D1370/D1350 Only)
Press [ ] to switch to the fax mode screen.
Specify destination.
01/01/2011 12:52AM
RX Mode: Auto
Resolution: 200 x 1
...
When the fax mode screen is displayed, you can make your
selection by using [ ] or [ ].
The currently selected menu item is highlighted. Press [OK]
to proceed to the next screen.
Specify destination.
01/01/2011 12:52AM
RX Mode: Auto
Resolution: 200 x 1
...
Scan Mode
Press [ ] to switch to the scan mode screen.
When the scan mode screen is displayed, you can make
your selection by using [ ] or [ ].
The currently selected menu item is highlighted. Press [OK]
to proceed to the next screen.
Select the scan type.
Computer
Remote Scanner
Memory Media
USB Direct Print Mode
When using the USB direct print function, press [ ]
to switch to the mode screen.
When the USB direct print mode screen is displayed, you
can make your selection by using [ ] or [ ].
The currently selected menu item is highlighted. Press [OK]
to proceed to the next screen.
Select printing
method.
Select File(s) to pri
Index print
Sort Files; File Nam
...
1-7
Before Using the Machine
This section describes how to navigate the menu and
configure menu options on the menu screen.
Use the following keys to navigate the menu and configure
menu options.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu Back
Entering the Menu Screen
Press [ ] (Menu) to enter the menu screen.
Scrolling the Menu
The scroll bar at the right side of the screen indicates that
more items are available in the menu.
To select an item that is not shown on the screen, press [ ]
or [ ] to scroll up and down the menu.
The currently selected item is highlighted with a black
background.
Menu
Preferences
Timer Settings
Common Settings
Copy Settings
Selecting a Menu Item
Press [OK] to select the highlighted menu.
When the menu has a submenu, press [ ] to select the
item and proceed to the next screen.
To return to the previous screen, press [ ] (Back) or [ ].
Timer Settings
Time & Date Settings
Sleep Timer
Auto Reset Timer
Screen After Auto R
...
[Back] or [◄]
[OK] or [►]
Menu
Preferences
Timer Settings
Common Settings
Copy Settings
Navigating the Menu
Configuring Menus Using the Navigation Keys
How to configure menus
What you want to do Screen example Procedure
Adjust levels such as density on
the scale
Density
- +
Background: Default
Press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the level.
Set the timer
Numeric key icon
Auto Reset Timer
2 min.
(0=Off, 1-9)
Press [ ] or [ ] to specify the value.
NOTE
Values that you can specify
You can specify any value shown in the parentheses at
the bottom of the screen.
When the numeric key icon is displayed on the
screen
You can enter it using the numeric keys.
“Entering Text” (→P. 1-9)
Enter numbers or characters such
as a PIN.
System Manager PIN
(Apply: Press OK)
*******
You can enter numbers or characters using the numeric
keys.
“Entering Text” (→P. 1-9)
Confirming the entry
To confirm the entered number or character:
• Press [OK].
• Select <Apply> displayed on the screen using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
1-8
Before Using the Machine
Returning to the Default Screen
Press [ ] (Menu) to exit the menu screen and return to
the default screen.
NOTE
If you press [ ] (Menu) before you press [OK]
The changes made to the settings are not saved.
1-9
Before Using the Machine
Entering Text
Enter information (text, symbols, and numbers) using the
following keys.
# C
Numeric
keys
OK
Keys to be used for this operation
Changing the Entry Mode
Register Unit Name
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
Select <Entry Mode> using [ ] and press [OK].
You can also press [ ] (Tone) to change the entry mode.
Entry mode Text that can be entered
<A> Alphabet (capital letters) and symbols
<a> Alphabet (small letters) and symbols
<12> Numbers
Entering Text, Symbols, and Numbers
Enter using the numeric keys or [ ] (SYMBOLS).
Key Entry mode:
<A>
Entry mode:
<a>
Entry mode:
<12>
@ . - _ / 1
ABC abc 2
DEF def 3
GHI ghi 4
JKL jkl 5
MNO mno 6
PQRS pqrs 7
TUV tuv 8
WXYZ wxyz 9
(Not available) 0
- . * # ! “ , ; : ^ ` _ = / | ‘ ?
$ @ % & + \ ( ) [ ] { } <>
~
(Not available)
Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)
Move the cursor by pressing [ ] or [ ].
To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text and
press [ ].
Deleting text, symbols, or numbers
To delete text, numbers, or symbols, press [ ] (Clear).
To delete all text, numbers, or symbols, press and hold
[] (Clear).
Example: Enter <CANON>.
1 Make sure that the entry mode is set to <A>.
2 Press [ ] until the letter “C” appears on the
screen.
Register Unit Name
C
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
3 Press [ ] until the letter “A” appears on the
screen.
Register Unit Name
CA
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
4 Press [ ] until the letter “N” appears on the
screen.
Register Unit Name
CAN
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
5 Press [ ] until the letter “O” appears on the
screen.
Register Unit Name
CANO
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
1-10
Before Using the Machine
6 Press [ ] until the letter “N” appears on the
screen.
Register Unit Name
CANON
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
7 Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
The entry is complete.
1-11
Before Using the Machine
Setting the Sleep Timer
The machine automatically enters the sleep mode after it has
been idle for a specified length of time.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <Timer Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Menu
Preferences
Timer Settings
Common Settings
Copy Settings
3 Select <Sleep Timer> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Timer Settings
Time & Date Settings
Sleep Timer
Auto Reset Timer
Screen After Auto R
...
4 Specify the time using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
* You can also enter values using the numeric keys.
* We recommend that you use the default timer setting.
Sleep Timer
5 min.
(3-240)
NOTE
To set the auto sleep timer
You can set the auto sleep timer between <3> and <240> minutes,
in one minute interval. The default is <5> minutes.
5 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
NOTE
When the machine enters the sleep mode
[ ] (Energy Saver) lights green.
To enter the sleep mode manually
Press [ ] (Energy Saver).
The machine does not enter the sleep mode when
• the machine is in the middle of operation
• the Processing/Data indicator lights or is blinking
• a message appears on the screen and the Error indicator is
blinking (except when <Output Tray Full> is displayed, or when
<No Paper> is displayed when there are no jobs (D1370/D1350
Only)).
• the machine is in the middle of adjustment or cleaning
• a paper jam occurs
• the handset of the external telephone is left unhooked
The machine returns from sleep mode when
• [ ] (Energy Saver) is pressed
• the external telephone is taken off the hook
1-12
Before Using the Machine
Setting the Current Date and Time
Specify the date and time display formats and set the current
date and time.
The specified date and time are used for some fax functions
and reports.
OK
Keys to be used for this operation
Menu
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <Timer Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Menu
Preferences
Timer Settings
Common Settings
Copy Settings
3 Select <Time & Date Settings> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Timer Settings
Time & Date Settings
Sleep Timer
Auto Reset Timer
Screen After Auto R
...
4 Select the setting using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Time & Date Settings
Date Display Type
12/24 Hour Clock
Current Time Settin
...
Time Zone Settings
Settings Purpose What to do
<Date
Display
Type>
Specify the
date display
format.
Select one of the following display
formats using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
The formats include the following.
• MM/DD/YYYY
• DD/MM YYYY
• YYYY MM/DD
<12/24
Hour
Clock>
Specify the
time display
format.
Select one of the following display
formats using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
The formats include the following.
• 12 Hour (AM/PM)
• 24 Hour
<Current
Time
Settings>*
Specify the
current
time and
date.
Use [ ] or [ ] to enter time and date,
or to switch between <AM> and
<PM>. To move the cursor, press
[ ] or [ ].
Current Time Settings
01/01/2011 12:52 AM
<Time Zone
Settings>
Specify the
time zone.
Select the time zone using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
<Daylight
Savings>
Specify
whether
to use the
daylight
saving time.
To use daylight saving time,
1. Select <On> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
2. Specify the starting date of the
daylight saving time.
- Select <Month> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
- Select the starting month and
press [OK].
- Select <Day> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
- Select the starting week and
press [OK].
- Select the starting day and press
[OK].
- Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
3. Repeat Step 2 to specify the ending
date.
* Make sure to configure <Time Zone Settings> before
configuring this setting (If you change <Time Zone
Settings>, <Current Time Settings> is changed accordingly).
5 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
2-1
Chapter 2
Document and Paper Handling
Document Type 2-2
Supported Document Types 2-2
Scan Area 2-3
Copy 2-3
FAX 2-3
Scan 2-3
Placing Documents 2-4
Placing Documents on the Platen Glass 2-4
Placing Documents in the Feeder 2-4
Supported Paper Types 2-6
Paper Size 2-6
Paper Type 2-7
Printable Area 2-8
Loading Paper 2-9
In the Paper Drawer 2-9
In the Multi-Purpose Tray 2-10
Precautions when Loading Paper 2-12
Paper Loading Capacity 2-12
Paper Loading Orientation 2-13
When printing paper with a letterhead or logo
(previously printed paper) 2-13
When printing on envelopes 2-13
Setting the Paper Size and Type 2-14
For the Paper Drawer 2-14
Setting a Custom Paper Size 2-14
Registering the Default Paper Settings for the Multi-purpose Tray 2-15
Selecting the Print Side 2-17
When <Print Speed Priority> is selected (the default setting) 2-17
When <Print Side Priority> is selected 2-17
2-2
Document and Paper Handling
Supported Document Types
Platen Glass Feeder
Type
• Plain paper
• Heavy paper
• Photograph
• Small documents (for example, index cards)
• Special types of paper (for example, tracing paper,
transparencies, etc.)*1
• Booklet (Up to 3/4” (20 mm) thickness)
Plain paper
(Multi-page documents of the same size, thickness and
weight/one-page documents)
Size (W x L) Up to 8 1/2” x 14” (216 mm x 356 mm) Maximum size: 8 1/2” x 14” (215.9 mm x 355.6 mm)
Minimum size: 5 1/2” x 5” (139.7 mm x 128 mm)
Weight Up to 4.4 lb (2 kg) 1-sided scanning (1 page): 13 to 28 lb Bond (50 to 105g/m²)
2-sided scanning: 17 to 28 lb Bond (64 to 105 g/m²)
Paper Capacity 1 sheet Up to 50 sheets (Letter)*2
Up to 30 sheets (Legal)*2
*1 To copy transparent documents (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), make sure to place the documents face down on the platen glass
and cover them with plain white paper.
*2 22 lb Bond (80 g/m²)
IMPORTANT
To place your document
Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the document is completely dry before placing it on the platen glass or into the feeder.
To prevent paper jams in the feeder
Do not use any of the following.
• Wrinkled or creased paper
• Carbon paper or carbon-backed paper
• Curled or rolled paper
• Coated paper
• Torn paper
• Onion skin or thin paper
• Stapled or clipped documents
• Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
• Transparencies
Document Type
2-3
Document and Paper Handling
Make sure that your scan area fits within the shaded area, as shown in the illustrations on the following page.
* Note that the margins indicated in the illustrations are for your reference. Actual margins can vary.
* Refer to the following document loading orientation.
• Platen glass: With the document face down
• Feeder: With the document loaded in the document feeder tray
Copy
Platen Glass Feeder
9/32"
(7 mm)
9/32"
(7 mm)
9/32"
(7 mm)
9/32"
(7 mm)
9/32"
(7 mm)
9/32"
(7 mm)
9/32"
(7 mm)
9/32"
(7 mm)
* See “Printable Area” (→P. 2-8) if you would like to know the practical printable area.
FAX
Platen Glass Feeder
1/8"
(3 mm)
1/8"
(3 mm)
3/64"
(1 mm)
3/64"
(1 mm)
1/8"
(3 mm)
1/8"
(3 mm)
3/64"
(1 mm)
3/64"
(1 mm)
Scan
Platen Glass Feeder
1/16"
(1.5 mm)
*The whole document can be scanned without any margins.
Scan Area
2-4
Document and Paper Handling
This section describes how to place documents on the platen
glass or in the feeder.
Placing Documents on the Platen Glass
1 Open the feeder.
2 Place your document face down.
3 Align the document with the appropriate paper
size marks.
If the document does not match any of the paper size marks, align
the center of your document with the arrow mark.
A4
B4
A5
A5
B4
A4
4 Close the feeder.
The machine is ready to scan or copy the document.
When scanning or copying is complete, remove the document
from the platen glass.
Placing Documents in the Feeder
1 Spread the document guides a little wider than
the document width.
2 Fan the document stack and align the edges of
the pages.
Thoroughly fan in
small batches
Align the edges on a
at surface a few times
3 Neatly place the document face up.
• Place the document under the load limit guides (A).
• Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit
marks (B).
(A)
(B)
Placing Documents
CAUTION
Precautions when closing the feeder
• Be careful not to get your fingers caught. This may
cause personal injury.
• Do not press down the feeder forcefully. This may
damage the platen glass and cause personal injury.
2-5
Document and Paper Handling
4 Align the document guides to fit the width of the
document.
The machine is ready to copy or scan the document.
IMPORTANT
Up to 50 documents can be loaded.
If more than 51 documents are loaded, paper jams may occur, or
the document may not be scanned.
While scanning a document
Do not add or remove documents.
When scanning is complete
Remove the document from the document delivery tray to avoid
paper jams.
Avoid scanning the same document more than 30 times.
When scanned repeatedly, the document can become folded or
torn, which may cause paper jams.
Be sure to align the document guides with the width of
the paper.
If the document guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in
misfeeds or paper jams.
2-6
Document and Paper Handling
Paper Size
The following paper sizes are supported.
* When printing a received fax, use A4 or Letter size paper.
If you print a received fax on a different paper size, the images may be cut off or split.
○ : Supported : Not supported
Paper size Paper Source
Paper drawer*1Multi-purpose tray
A4 (8 1/4” x 11 3/4” (210 mm x 297 mm))*2*3*4○ ○
B5 (7 1/8" x 10 1/8" (182 mm x 257 mm)) ○ ○
A5 (5 7/8" x 8 1/4" (148 mm x 210 mm)) ○ ○
Legal (8 1/2" x 14" (215.9 mm x 355.6 mm))*2○ ○
Letter (8 1/2" x 11" (215.9 mm x 279.4 mm))*2*3*4○ ○
Statement (5 1/2" x 8 1/2" (139.7 mm x 215.9 mm)) ― ○
Executive (7 1/4" x 10 1/2" (184 mm x 266.7 mm)) ○ ○
Officio (8 1/2" x 12 1/2" (215.9 mm x 317.5 mm)) ○ ○
B-officio (8 1/2" x 14" (216 mm x 355 mm)) ○ ○
M-officio (8 1/2" x 13 3/8" (215.9 mm x 341 mm)) ○ ○
Government - Letter (8" x 10 1/2" (203.2 mm x 266.7 mm)) ○ ○
Government - Legal (8" x 13" (203.2 mm x 330.2 mm)) ○ ○
Foolscap (8 1/2" x 13" (215.9 mm x 330.2 mm) ○ ○
A-foolscap (8 1/8" x 13 3/8" (205.7 mm x 337.8 mm)) ○ ○
Envelope COM10 (4 1/8" x 9 1/2" (104.7 mm x 241.3 mm))*5○
Envelope Monarch (3 7/8" x 7 1/2"(98.4 mm x 190.5 mm))*5○
Envelope C5 (6 3/8" x 9" (162 mm x 229 mm))*5○
Envelope B5 (6 7/8" x 9 7/8" (176 mm x 250 mm))*5○
Envelope DL (4 3/8" x 8 5/8" (110 mm x 220 mm))*5○
Index Card (3" x 5" (76 mm x 127 mm)) ○
Custom Paper Size ○*6
*1 This type of paper can be loaded also in the optional paper drawer (Drawer 2).
*2 Can be used for automatic 2-sided printing.
*3 Can be used for printing received faxes.
*4 Can be used for printing reports or lists.
*5 Make sure the flap is folded.
*6 You can set custom paper size of Width: 5” to 14” (127 to 356 mm) and Length: 3” to 8 1/2” (76 to 216 mm).
Specify the paper size in portrait orientation (Height ≧ Width) and within the range that can be defined.
NOTE
Default paper size
The default paper size is Letter. To use a different paper size, change the paper size setting.
“Setting the Paper Size and Type” (→P. 2-14)
Using chlorine-free paper
Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.
Supported Paper Types
2-7
Document and Paper Handling
Paper Type
The following paper types are supported.
: Unavailable
Paper Type Printer Driver Setting
Paper Source/Paper Capacity
Paper Drawer 1 Paper Drawer 2
(optional)
Multi-purpose
Tray
Plain paper*1*216 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m2)[Plain Paper]
[Plain Paper L]*4500 sheets 500 sheets 50 sheet
Heavy paper*324 to 34 lb Bond (90 to 128 g/m2) [Heavy Paper 1] 320 sheets 320 sheets 40 sheet
35 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover (129 to 163 g/m2) [Heavy Paper 2] 25 sheet
Recycled
paper*1*216 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m2) [Recycled Paper] 500 sheets 500 sheets 50 sheet
Color paper*1*216 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m2) [Color Paper] 500 sheets 500 sheets 50 sheet
Transparency*5[Transparency] 15 sheet
Label [Labels] 20 sheet
Index Card [Index Card] 15 sheet
Envelope [Envelope] 5 sheets
*1 Can be used for automatic 2-sided printing.
*2 Can be used for printing received faxes.
*3 Automatic 2-sided printing is available for up to 34 lb Bond (128 g/m²) of heavy papers.
*4 To use pre-printed paper, set the paper type to [Plain Paper L] if it is curled. Note that toner may not flow well into the paper.
*5 Use only the types designed for laser printers.
To prevent paper jams, do not use the following paper types.
• Wrinkled or creased paper
• Curled or rolled paper
• Torn paper
• Damp paper
• Very thin paper
• Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer (Do not copy on the reverse side.)
The following paper types do not print well:
• Highly textured paper
• Very smooth paper
• Glossy paper
Make sure that the paper is free of dust, lint, and oil stains.
Make sure to test print before purchasing large quantities of copy paper.
Keep the paper wrapped in its original package (unopened or opened) and
stored in a cool, dry place until ready to use. Make sure to keep it on a flat
surface.
Store paper stacks in a place where temperatures are somewhere between
64.4 to 75.2°F (18 to 24°C) and humidity is somewhere between 40 % to 60
% RH.
CAUTION
To print on damp paper
The following problems may occur.
• Steam is emitted from the machine’s
output area.
• Water droplets form on the back side of
the operation panel and in the output
area.
Moisture evaporates from damp paper
due to the heat generated inside the fixing
unit (it is most likely to occur at low room
temperatures). This is not a malfunction, but
you can prevent this by using a stack of new
unopened paper.
Should you smell something burning,
immediately turn OFF the machine, unplug
the power plug from the AC power outlet,
and contact your local authorized Canon
dealer or the Canon help line. Continued use
may lead to a fire or electrical shock.
2-8
Document and Paper Handling
The shaded area in the illustration on the following page represents the printable area.
Note that the margins indicated in the illustration are for your reference. Actual margins can vary.
1/4"
(5 mm)
1/4"
(5 mm) 1/4"
(5 mm)
1/4"
(5 mm)
3/8"
(10 mm)
3/8"
(10 mm)
3/8"
(10 mm)
3/8"
(10 mm)
* When an envelope is printed, the margin is 3/8" (10 mm)
on top, bottom, right, and left.
NOTE
To enlarge the printable area
Apply the following setting from the printer driver.
1. Click [Advanced Settings] in the [Finishing] page of printer driver.
2. Set [Enlarge Print Area] to [ON].
* Depending on the job, the data may not be printed in a part of document edge, or the bottom edge of paper or the following paper may be
tainted.
* This setting is valid only when the job is printed from the printer driver.
Printable Area
2-9
Document and Paper Handling
This section describes how to load paper in the paper drawer
and the multi-purpose tray.
NOTE
To set your choice of paper size or type
By default, the paper size is set to <Letter>, and the type to <Plain
(16 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>. To use a different paper size or type, you
need to change the default settings.
“Setting the Paper Size and Type” (→P. 2-14)
In the Paper Drawer
Before loading paper in the paper drawer, see “Precautions
when Loading Paper” (→P. 2-12).
NOTE
How to load the paper in the optional paper drawer (Drawer 2):
Same as in Drawer 1.
1 Pull out the paper drawer.
2 Slide the paper guides to the size mark for the
paper to be loaded.
While holding the lock release lever (A), adjust the length of the
paper guide.
(A)
(A)
* If you want to change the size of the paper to be loaded, be sure
to register the paper size in “Setting the Paper Size and Type”
(→P. 2-14).
3 Fan the document stack and even the ends.
Thoroughly fan in
small batches
Align the edges on a
at surface a few times
4 Load the paper with the printing side down
so that it aligns with the rear side of the paper
drawer.
Load the paper in portrait orientation.
NOTE
When loading paper with a letterhead or logo
See, “Paper Loading Orientation” (→P. 2-13), and load the paper in
the proper orientation.
5 Hold down the paper, then set it under the hooks
(A) on the paper guides.
(A)
(A)
(A)
Loading Paper
2-10
Document and Paper Handling
IMPORTANT
Adjust the paper guides to the paper width without
space.
If the paper guides are loose or tight, this may result in misfeeds or
paper jams.
6 Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed
the line of the load limit mark (A).
* Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the line of the
load limit mark. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit mark
lines, this may result in misfeeds.
(A)
(A)
(A)
7 Specify the loaded paper size and type.
“Setting the Paper Size and Type” (→P. 2-14)
In the Multi-Purpose Tray
Before loading paper in the multi-purpose tray, see
“Precautions when Loading Paper” (→P. 2-12).
Use the multi-purpose tray when you want to copy or print on
a different paper size or type from the one loaded in the paper
drawer.
1 Open the multi-purpose tray and pull out the
auxiliary tray.
When loading long-size paper
open the tray extension.
2 Spread the paper guides a little wider than the
actual paper width.
2-11
Document and Paper Handling
3 Gently insert the paper stack into the multi-
purpose tray with the print side face up.
“Paper Loading Capacity” (→P. 2-12)
“Paper Loading Orientation” (→P. 2-13)
When loading envelopes
(1)
Fold the envelope flap.
(2) Loosen any stiff corners of the envelope and flatten curls as
shown in the figure.
(3)
Gently insert the envelope into the multi-purpose tray with the
print side face up.
4 Adjust the paper guides to the paper width
without space.
IMPORTANT
Adjust the paper guides to the paper width without
space.
If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in
misfeeds or paper jams.
5 Be sure that the paper stack is loaded under the
load limit guides (A).
(A)
6 Specify the loaded paper size and type.
“Setting the Paper Size and Type” (→P. 2-14)
2-12
Document and Paper Handling
CAUTION
Be careful when handling paper.
Handle paper carefully not to cut your hands with the edges
of the paper.
Precautions when inserting the paper drawer
Be careful not to catch your fingers.
Precautions when Loading Paper
IMPORTANT
Adjust the paper guides to the paper width without
space.
If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, this may result in
misfeeds or paper jams.
When using paper that has been poorly cut
If you use paper that has been poorly cut, multiple sheets of paper
may be fed at once. In this case, fan the paper thoroughly, and then
align the edges of the stack properly on a hard, flat surface.
Do not exceed the line of the load limit mark when
loading paper.
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the line of the load
limit mark. If the paper stack exceeds the load limit mark lines, this
may result in misfeeds.
When printing on envelopes
Load envelopes with the front side (non-glued side) facing up. You
cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
Also, be sure to close the flap before loading envelopes.
NOTE
For more information on supported paper types
“Supported Paper Types” (→P. 2-6)
Abbreviations on the paper guides inside the paper
drawer
Paper size Paper guide
Legal LGL
Letter LTR
Executive EXEC
Paper Loading Capacity
(C)
(B)
(A)
Paper Type
Paper Source
(A)
Multi-purpose
tray
(B)
Drawer 1
(C)
Drawer 2
(optional)
Plain
paper
16 to 23 lb
Bond (60 to
89 g/m²)
Approx.
50sheets
Approx.
500 sheets
Approx.
500 sheets
Heavy
paper
24 to 34 lb
Bond (90 to
128 g/m²)
Approx.
40sheets
Approx.
320 sheets
Approx.
320sheets
35 lb Bond
to 60 lb
Cover (129
to 163 g/m²)
Approx.
25sheets - -
Recycled
paper
16 to 23 lb
Bond (60 to
89 g/m²)
Approx.
50sheets
Approx.
500 sheets
Approx.
500 sheets
Color
paper
16 to 23 lb
Bond (60 to
89 g/m²)
Approx.
50sheets
Approx.
500 sheets
Approx.
500 sheets
Transparency Approx.
15 sheets - -
Label Approx.
20sheets - -
Index Card Approx.
15sheets - -
Envelope Approx.
5sheets - -
2-13
Document and Paper Handling
Paper Loading Orientation
NOTE
Paper loading orientation when loading in the multi-
purpose tray
The paper loading orientation for the multi-purpose tray is the
same as that for the paper drawer.
When printing paper with a letterhead or logo
(previously printed paper)
Load the paper in the proper orientation as follows.
(: Feeding direction)
Paper drawer
Portrait layout Landscape layout
1-sided
printing*1
(with the printing
side facing down)
(with the printing
side facing down)
1-sided
printing*2
(with the printing
side facing up)
(with the printing
side facing up)
Automatic
2-sided
printing
(with the front side
facing up)
(with the front side
facing up)
*1 When <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Speed
Priority> (the default setting)
“Selecting the Print Side” (→P. 2-17)
*2 When <Switch Paper Feed Method> us set to <Print Side Priority>
“Selecting the Print Side” (→P. 2-17)
Multi-purpose tray
Portrait layout Landscape layout
1-sided
printing*1
(with the printing
side facing up)
(with the printing
side facing up)
1-sided
printing*2
(with the printing
side facing down)
(with the printing
side facing down)
Automatic
2-sided
printing
(with the front side
facing down)
(with the front side
facing down)
*1 When <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Speed
Priority> (the default setting)
“Selecting the Print Side” (→P. 2-17)
*2 When <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print Side Priority>
“Selecting the Print Side” (→P. 2-17)
When printing on envelopes
Load envelopes with the front side (non-glued side) facing
up to the Multi-purpose tray as shown below.
(: Feeding direction)
Envelope No.10, DL, ISO-C5
Load the envelopes so that the flap is toward the left of the
machine when it is viewed from the front.
Envelope ISO-B5
Load the envelopes so that the flap is toward the back of the
machine when it is viewed from the front.
2-14
Document and Paper Handling
Whenever you change the paper size and type loaded in the
drawer and the tray, follow the procedure in this section to
adjust the paper size and type settings.
IMPORTANT
If the setting is different from the size of the loaded
paper
An error message appears, or printing is not performed correctly.
For the Paper Drawer
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Select Paper/Settings
1 Press [ ] (Select Paper/Settings).
2 Select <Paper Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Select Paper
MP Tray
LTR:Plain
Paper Settings
1
3 Select < Drawer 1> or < Drawer 2> using [ ] or
[ ] and press [OK].
< Drawer 2> is displayed only when the optional paper drawer
(Drawer 2) is installed.
Paper Settings
Multi-Purpose Tray
Drawer 1
Drawer 2
Register Custom Paper
4 Select a paper size using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Paper Size
LTR
LGL
EXEC
FOOLSCAP
5 Select the paper type using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Paper Type
Plain (16 lb Bond-23
Plain L (16 lb Bond
...
Recycled
Color
6 Press [ ] (Select Paper/Settings) to close the
<Select Paper> screen.
Setting a Custom Paper Size
You can register sizes and types of frequently used paper.
Multi-purpose tray
- When <Register Default Set.> is <Off> (default)
The screen to be displayed when paper is loaded in the multi-
purpose tray
Paper Size (MP Tray)
1. 5 x 9 "
LTR
LGL
STMT
- When <Register Default Set.> is <ON>
Paper Size Setting Screen
Paper Size
1. 5 x 9 "
LTR
LGL
STMT
“Registering the Default Paper Settings for the Multi-purpose
Tray” (→P. 2-15)
1 Press [ ] (Select Paper/Settings).
2 Select <Paper Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Select Paper
MP Tray
LTR:Plain
Paper Settings
1
3 Select <Register Custom Paper> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Paper Settings
Multi-Purpose Tray
Drawer 1
Register Custom Paper
Setting the Paper Size and Type
2-15
Document and Paper Handling
4 Select <Not Registered> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
When selecting the registered custom paper, you can edit and
delete the custom paper.
Register Custom Paper
1. Not Registered
2. Not Registered
3. Not Registered
5 Specify the size of <X: “> direction and <Y: “>
direction.
Specify the paper size in portrait orientation (<Y> ≧ <X>) and
within the range that can be defined.
(1) Select the direction using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Specify Size
<Apply>
X: 0 "
Y: 0 "
X
Y
(2) Specify the size using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
You can also enter values using the numeric keys.
Set Length for X
(3-8_1/2)
3_0/0 "
(3) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Specify Size
<Apply>
X: 3 "
Y: 5 "
X
Y
6 Select the paper type using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Paper Type
Plain (16 lb Bond-23
Plain L (16 lb Bond
...
Recycled
Color
7 Press [ ] (Select Paper/Settings) to close the
<Select Paper> screen.
Registering the Default Paper Settings
for the Multi-purpose Tray
If you want to always load the same paper in the multi-
purpose tray, register the default paper using the following
procedure.
NOTE
If the default paper is registered
The setting screen is not displayed when paper is loaded.
1 Press [ ] (Select Paper/Settings).
2 Select <Paper Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Select Paper
MP Tray
LTR:Plain
Paper Settings
1
3 Select <Multi-Purpose Tray> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Paper Settings
Multi-Purpose Tray
Drawer 1
Register Custom Paper
4 Select <On> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Register Default Set.
Off
On
Set Details
5 Select <Paper Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Select Paper
LTR:Plain
LTR:Plain
Paper Settings
1
6 Select <Multi-Purpose Tray> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Paper Settings
Multi-Purpose Tray
Drawer 1
Register Custom Paper
2-16
Document and Paper Handling
7 Select <Set Details> using [ ] or [ ] and
press[OK].
Register Default Set.
Off
On
Set Details
8 Select a paper size using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
* To register a custom paper, see “Setting a Custom Paper Size”
(→P. 2-14)
* The registered custom paper is listed at the top.
Select it with [ ].
Paper Size
LTR
LGL
STMT
EXEC
If you select <Custom Size>
Specify the size of <X: “> direction and <Y: “> direction of the
custom paper.
Specify the paper size in portrait orientation (<Y> ≧ <X>) and
within the range that can be defined.
(1) Select the direction using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Specify Size
<Apply>
X: 0 "
Y: 0 "
X
Y
(2) Specify the size using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
You can also enter values using the numeric keys.
Set Length for X
(3-8_1/2)
3_0/0 "
(3) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Specify Size
<Apply>
X: 3 "
Y: 5 "
X
Y
9 Select the paper type using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Paper Type
Plain (16 lb Bond-23
Plain L (16 lb Bond
...
Recycled
Color
10
Press [ ] (Select Paper/Settings) to close the
<Select Paper> screen.
2-17
Document and Paper Handling
Specify whether to print only on the front side of paper for
1-sided printing so that the odd pages are always
printed on the front side for both 1-sided and 2-sided printing.
The print side for 1-sided printing varies depending on the
setting specified. To use preprinted paper, read
“Paper Loading Orientation” (→P. 2-13) carefully to place the
paper stack in the correct orientation.
IMPORTANT
Paper Size and Paper Type
If you select unsupported paper size or paper type for 2-sided
printing, the settings applied in this section will be invalid.
When <Print Speed Priority> is selected
(the default setting)
All pages (odd and even) are printed on the back side for
1-sided printing while the odd pages are printed on the first
side for 2-sided printing, as shown below.
* Make sure to place the stack correctly to use preprinted
paper, as the side to be placed face up varies between
1-sided and 2-sided printing.
1-sided
printing
2-sided
printing
Front Back
Select this setting when
• using paper types other than preprinted paper
• using preprinted paper only for 1-sided printing
When <Print Side Priority> is selected
All pages are printed on the first side for 1-sided printing so
the odd pages are always printed on the first side for both
1-sided and 2-sided printing, as shown below.
* The side to be placed face up is the same between 1-sided
and 2-sided printing, even when using preprinted paper.
1-sided
printing
2-sided
printing
Front Back
Select this setting when
• using preprinted paper for both 1-sided and 2-sided
printing
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <Common Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Menu
Preferences
Timer Settings
Common Settings
Copy Settings
3 Select <Switch Paper Feed Method> using [ ] or
[ ] and press [OK].
Common Settings
Drawer Auto Selection
Switch Paper Feed Met
4 Select the paper source using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Paper Feed Method
Multi-Purpose Tray
Drawer 1
5 Select <Print Speed Priority> or <Print Side
Priority> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Multi-Purpose Tray
Print Speed Priority
Print Side Priority
Selecting the Print Side
2-18
Document and Paper Handling
<Print
Speed
Priority>
Place the paper stack as shown below when <Print
Speed Priority> is selected.
(: Feeding direction)
* For details on the procedure for loading paper
when using multi-purpose tray or when printing
pages of the landscape layout, see ”Paper Loading
Orientation” (→P. 2-13).
For 1-sided printing For 2-sided printing
Place the stack with
the printed side face
down.
Place the stack with
the front side (first
page) face up.
<Print Side
Priority>
Place the paper stack as shown below when <Print
Side Priority> is selected.
(: Feeding direction)
* For details on the procedure for loading paper
when using multi-purpose tray or when printing
pages of the landscape layout, see ”Paper Loading
Orientation” (→P. 2-13).
The side to be placed face up is the same
between 1-sided and 2-sided printing.
• Place the stack with the printed side face
up for 1-sided printing.
• Place the stack with the front side (first
page) face up for 2-sided printing.
6 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
3-1
Chapter 3
Copying
This chapter describes how to use the copy functions.
Basic Copy Operations 3-2
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs 3-3
Canceling a copy job using [ ] (Stop) 3-3
Checking and canceling a copy job using [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) 3-3
Copy Settings 3-4
Selecting Copy Papers 3-4
Adjusting the Density 3-5
Selecting the Document Type 3-5
2-Sided Copying 3-6
Enlarging/Reducing Copies 3-7
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1) 3-7
Collating Copies 3-8
Erasing Dark Borders or Frame Lines ( Frame Erase) 3-8
Emphasizing the Outline of an Image (Sharpness) 3-8
Copying an ID Card 3-9
Registering and Using Combination of Copy Settings
(Mode Memory) 3-10
Registering Mode Memory 3-10
Deleting Mode Memory 3-10
Calling and Copying Mode Memory 3-11
Changing the Default Settings 3-12
Viewing Copy Settings 3-13
3-2
Copying
This section describes the basic procedure for copying.
1
Place your document.
“Placing Documents” (→P. 2-4)
“Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
* Up to 50 documents can be loaded into the feeder.
2
Press [ ].
3
Specify the copy settings as needed.
You can specify up to 9 items.
(for details, see P.3-4 to P.3-8.)
Paper select
Density
Document Type
2-Sided
Enlarging/Reducing
N on 1
Collating
Frame erase
Sharpness
NOTE
Copy Settings
• When you combine multiple settings for use, see “Combination of
Copy Settings” (→P. 3-4).
• The settings specified here are effective only for the current operation.
To make the settings effective for all the copy operations, see
“Changing the Default Settings” (→P. 3-12).
• Register your frequently used settings into the Mode Memory. It is
useful. See “Registering and Using Combination of Copy Settings
(Mode Memory)” (→P. 3-10).
4
Enter the copy quantity (1 to 99) using numeric
keys.
* Press [ ] (Clear) to cancel the entered quantity.
5
Press [ ] (Start).
Basic Copy Operations
3-3
Copying
Checking and Canceling Copy Jobs
Check the details of copy jobs. Cancel copy jobs that you
decide not to perform while the jobs are processing.
NOTE
When the processing/Data indicator on the operation
panel is:
Turned on/blinking A job is currently processing.
Turned off No jobs are waiting in memory.
Canceling a copy job using [ ] (Stop)
1 Press [ ] (Stop).
* Press [ ] (Stop) twice to cancel the job when the machine
holds one job only.
2 Select the job that you want to cancel when more
than one job is processing using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
3 Select <Yes> using [ ] or [ ] when <Cancel?>
appears and press [OK].
Or, press [ ] (Stop) to cancel the job.
The job is canceled.
Cancel?
<No>
<Yes>
Details
* Select <Details> using [ ] or [ ] to check the details of the
job that you want to cancel and press [OK].
Checking and canceling a copy job using [ ]
(Status Monitor/Cancel)
1 Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Select <Copy/Print Job> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Status Monitor/Cancel
Device Status
Copy/Print Job
TX Job
RX Job
3 Select <Job Status> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Copy/Print Job
Job Status
Copy Job History
Print Job History
4 Select a job using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
The details of the selected job is displayed.
Details
<Cancel>
Job Number: 0020
Status: Printing
Time: 01/01 09:42AM
To cancel the job
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Details
<Cancel>
Job Number: 0001
Status: Copying
Time: 01/01 12:52AM
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
The job is canceled.
Cancel?
NoYes
(3) Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.
To only check the details of the selected job
Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) after you have checked the
details of the selected job to close the screen.
3-4
Copying
Copy Settings
Combination of Copy Settings
You can combine and use various copy settings.
This applies to Mode Memory registration and default settings (→P. 3-12) as well.
However, the following limitation is found in the setting combination.
<No. of Copies> Nothing special.
<Density> When <Background> is set to <Auto>, <Original Type> is changed to <Text>.
<Original Type> If <Original Type> is set other than <Text> when <Background> is set to <Auto>, the <Auto> setting in <Background>
will be cancelled.
<2-Sided>
• Depending on its paper size (selected paper drawer), 2-sided copy is not available.
• Depending on its paper size or paper type in the selected paper source, 2-sided copy is not available.
“e-Manual → Specifications → Paper → Supported Paper Types”
• This feature cannot be combined with <ID Card Copy>.
<Copy Ratio>
• When you want to copy documents in a reduction ratio different from its default setting for <4 on 1>/<2 on 1>, secify
the <Copy Ratio> later.
• <Copy Ratio> is fixed at 100 % for <ID Card Copy>.
• The frame width specified at <Erase Frame> increases/decreases according to the <Copy Ratio> setting.
<Paper> Depending on its paper size (selected paper source), 2-sided copy is not available.
<4 on 1>/
<2 on 1>
• If you want to copy a document in a copy ratio different from its default reduction ratio, specify the <Copy Ratio> later.
• This feature cannot be combined with <Erase Frame>.
<ID Card Copy> • <Copy Ratio> is fixed at 100%.
• This feature cannot be combined with either 2-Sided Copy or <Erase Frame>.
<Collate> Nothing special.
<Erase Frame> • This feature cannot be combined with N on 1 (<4 on 1> / <2 on 1>, <ID Card Copy>).
• The specified erase frame width increases/decreases according to the <Copy Ratio> setting.
<Sharpness> Nothing special.
Selecting Copy Papers
Copy mode screen Setting screen*
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
2-Sided: Off
Copy Ratio: 100% Di
...
Paper: LTR:Plain
11
1
Select Paper
LTR:Plain
LTR:Plain
Paper Settings
1
Select the paper drawer using [ ] or [ ] → [OK]
* You can display the setting
screen also by selecting
<Paper> in the copy mode
screen.
Select Paper/
Setting
3-5
Copying
Copy Settings
Adjusting the Density
11
+
-
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Density: 0
Original Type: Text
...
2-Sided: Off
Adjust the density using [ ] or [ ] → [OK]
Copy mode screen Density adjustment
Setting screen
[ ] Decrease the
density.
[ ] Increase the
density.
Select <Density> using [ ] or [ ] → [OK]
Density
- +
Background: Default
Background
Auto
Adjustment
Adjustment
- +
Background
Auto
Adjustment
Density
- +
Background: Default
Background Adjustment
Setting screen
Select <Background> using
[▲] or [▼] → [OK]
Select <Auto> using [▲] or [▼]
→ [OK]
(1) Select <Adjustment> using
[▲] or [▼] → [OK]
[ ] Makes the background
density lighter.
[]Makes the background
density darker.
Automatic adjustment
Manual adjustment
(2) Adjust background color
using[
▲
] or [
▼
] → [OK]
Selecting the Document Type
Original Type
Text
Text/Photo
Text/Photo (Quality)
Photo
Copy mode screen Setting screen
When selecting <Text/Photo (Quality)>
11
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Density: 0
Original Type: Text/
2-Sided: Off
+
-
Select <Original Type> using
[ ] or [ ] → [OK]
Select the appropriate document type
using [▲] or [▼]→[OK]
Adjust priority using [ ] or [ ]→[OK]
Adjust Level
Text Priority
Photo Priority
<Text> Best suited for text-only documents.
<Text/Photo> Suited for documents that contain text and
photos.
<Text/Photo
(Quality)>
Suited for documents that contain text
and photos. You can set its priority, text or
photos.
<Photo> Suited for documents that contain magazine
photos.
[ ] Prioritize text readability.
[ ] Prioritize illustration readability
such as photos.
3-6
Copying
Copy Settings
2-Sided Copying
Copy mode screen Setting screen*
11
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Density: 0
Original Type: Text/
2-Sided: Off
+
-
2-Sided
Off
1 2-Sided
2 2-Sided
2 1-Sided
Notes on 2-Sided copying
Accurately attach the paper size switch lever. If the paper size switch lever is not securely attached,
documents may not be fed properly or jammed.
“1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing” (→P. 4-4)
If you want to specify how to open document or copy
(1) Select <Format Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
2-Sided
1 2-Sided
2 2-Sided
2 1-Sided
Format Settings
(2) Select <2->2-Sided> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Format Settings
1 2-Sided
2 2-Sided
2 1-Sided
(3) Select the orientation of the original document
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Original Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
(4) Select how to open the original document
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Original Format
Book Type
Calendar Type
(5) Select how to open the output using [ ] or
[ ] and press [OK].
Finishing Format
Book Type
Calendar Type
To copy a document by placing on the platen glass
(1) Place the next page and press [ ] (Start).
* Repeat this step until all pages are scanned.
Scan Next: Press Start
<Start Copying>
<Cancel>
SheetxCopy:1x1
Density: 0
+
-
(2) Select <Start Copying> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
2-Sided
* You can display the setting screen
also by selecting <2-Sided> in the
copy mode screen.
Select the 2-Sided copy format using [ ] or [ ] → [OK]
<1→2-sided> Copy a 1-sided document onto both sides of the output.
<2→2-sided> You can make 2-sided copies from 2-sided documents.
<2→1-sided> You can make 1-sided copies from 2-sided documents.
3-7
Copying
Copy Settings
Enlarging/Reducing Copies
Copy mode screen Setting screen
11
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Original Type: Text
...
2-Sided: Off
Copy Ratio: 100% Dir
Copy Ratio
Custom Ratio
100% Direct
400% Max
200%
Select the copy ratio using [ ] or [ ] →[OK]
“Loading Paper” (→P. 2-9)
“Setting the Paper Size and Type” (→P. 2-14)
Enlarge or reduce copies using preset
copy ratios or custom copy ratios. For
example, you can copy Statement to
Letter size paper using a preset ratio,
or set any copy ratio from 25% to
400% in 1% increments.
To set a copy ratio in 1% increments
(1) Select <Custom Ratio> using [] or [ ]
→[OK]
Copy Ratio
Custom Ratio
100% Direct
400% Max
200%
(2) Specify the ratio using [ ] or [ ] →[OK]
You can also enter the copy ratio using the numeric Keys
for D1370/D1350.
Custom Ratio
100 %
(25-400)
Select <Copy Ratio> using [ ] or [ ]
→[OK]
Output Size
LTR:Plain
LTR:Plain
1
Select Layout
2 on 1 (1)
2 on 1 (2)
4 on 1 (1)
4 on 1 (2)
N on 1
Off
2 on 1
4 on 1
ID Card Copy
Setting screenneercsedomypoC
Select <2 on 1> or <4 on 1> using [▲] or [▼]→[OK]
Select the size of the document using [▲] or [▼]→[OK]
Select a output size using [▲] or [▼]→[OK]
To specify the layout
(1) Select <Select Layout> using [▲] or [▼]
→ [OK]
(2) Select the layout using [▲] or [▼] → [OK]
When your document is placed on
the platen glass
(1) Set the next document and press [ ]
(Start).
(2) Select <Start Copying> using [▲] or [▼]
and press [OK].
* Repeat these steps until all documents are scanned.
About margins on the document
To copy in the N on 1 mode, margins are
created on the output.
Select <N on 1> using [▲] or [▼]→[OK]
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Copy Ratio: 100% Di
...
Paper: LTR:Plain
N on 1: Off
11
1
Scan Size
LTR
LGL
STMT
Scan Next: Press Start
<Start Copying>
<Cancel>
SheetxCopy:1x1
Density: 0
+
-
Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)
<2 on 1> Copy two pages
onto one sheet.
<4 on 1> Copy four pages
onto one sheet.
3-8
Copying
Copy Settings
Collating Copies
Copy mode screen Setting screen
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Paper: LTR:Plain
N on 1: Off
Collate: Off
11
1
Collate
Off
On
<Off>
Printouts of a complete job are grouped.
For example, if you are copying three copies of a three-page
document, printouts of a complete job are grouped and arranged
in this page order: “1, 1, 1”, “2, 2, 2”, “3, 3, 3.”
<On>
Printouts of a complete job are collated.
For example, if you are copying three copies of a three-page
document, printouts of a complete job are grouped and arranged
in this page order: “1, 2, 3”, “1, 2, 3”, “1, 2, 3.”
Select <On> using [ ] or [ ] →[OK]Select <Collate> using [ ] or [ ] →[OK]
Emphasizing the Outline of an Image (Sharpness)
Copy mode screen Setting screen
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Collate: On
Erase Frame: Off
Sharpness: 0
11
+
-
Sharpness
- +
[ ]
To clearly capture halftone photos,
adjust this setting to the appropriate
level on the <-> scale. This can
counteract the effect of moiré patterns
(uneven gradation and striped patterns).
[ ]
To clearly capture text or lines, adjust
this setting to the appropriate level on
the <+> scale. It is best suited for
copying blueprints and very weak
pencil manuscripts.
Select <Sharpness> using [ ] or
[ ] →[OK]
Adjust the sharpness using [ ]
or [ ]→[OK]
Erasing Dark Borders or Frame Lines ( Frame Erase)
Copy mode screen Setting screen
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
N on 1: Off
Collate: On
Erase Frame: Off
11
Erase Frame
Off
On
Specify Frame Width
(1/16-1_15/16)
0_1/8 "
Scan Size
LTR
LGL
STMT
Select <On> using [ ] or [ ] →[OK]
Select the size of the original document
using [ ] or [ ] →[OK]
Select <Erase Frame> using [ ] or [ ]
→[OK]
Select the frame width to be erased using
[] or [ ] →[OK].
* You can also enter the frame width to be
erased using the numeric keys.
3-9
Copying
Copy a 2-sided card onto one side of paper.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK Start
COPY
1 Place a card on the platen glass, and then close
the feeder.
Place the card with spacing of 1/4” (5 mm) from the left edge of the
platen glass.
Align the center of the card with the arrow mark, as shown below.
To place the card
horizontally A4
B4
A5
A5
B4
A4
To place the card vertically A4
B4
A5
A5
B4
A4
2 Press [ ].
3 Select <N on 1> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Copy Ratio: 100% Di
...
Paper: LTR:Plain
N on 1: Off
11
1
4 Select <ID Card Copy> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
N on 1
Off
2 on 1
4 on 1
ID Card Copy
5 Press [ ] (Start).
Proceed to the next step when the scan is complete.
6 Turn sides.
Place the card with spacing of 1/4” (5 mm) from the left edge of the
platen glass.
Align the center of the card with the arrow mark, as shown below.
To place the card
horizontally A4
B4
A5
A5
B4
A4
To place the card
vertically A4
B4
A5
A5
B4
A4
7 Press [ ] (Start).
NOTE
To place your document (card) on the platen glass
Place the card on the left half of the platen glass.
Copy ratio
The copy ratio is automatically set to <100%>.
Supported paper sizes
Sizes larger than A4/Letter.
Copying an ID Card
3-10
Copying
Registering and Using Combination of Copy Settings (Mode Memory)
You can register up to four combinations of frequently used
copy settings to the “Mode memory” in advance.
IMPORTANT
Registered settings of Mode Memory
• Registered settings in the Mode Memory are saved even during
power OFF.
• When settings which require the options are registered in a
Mode Memory, the memory becomes unavailable if that option
is removed, but its settings remain saved.
• When an optional drawer usage is registered in a Mode Memory,
the paper feeding setting is changed to Drawer 1 if that optional
drawer is removed.
Registering Mode Memory
Keys to be used for this operation
COPY
OK
1 Press [ ].
2 Select <Mode Memory> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Erase Frame: Off
Sharpness: 0
Mode Memory: Off
11
+
-
3 Select <Register/Delete> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Mode Memory
Register/Delete
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
4 Select the place to register using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
* Select any registered place, then you can edit settings.
Register/Delete
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
5 Select items to specify using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Mode 1
<Apply>
<Delete>
No. of Copies: 1
Density: 0
+
-
For details on the settings, see “Copy Settings” (→P. 3-4).
6 Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] after you have
specified the setting and press [OK].
Mode 1
<Apply>
<Delete>
No. of Copies: 1
Density: 0
+
-
7 Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
Register?
NoYes
* Follow the same steps for overwriting settings as well.
Deleting Mode Memory
Keys to be used for this operation
COPY
OK
1 Press [ ].
2 Select <Mode Memory> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Erase Frame: Off
Sharpness: 0
Mode Memory: Off
11
+
-
3-11
Copying
3 Select <Register/Delete> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Mode Memory
Register/Delete
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
4 Select a Mode Memory to delete using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Register/Delete
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
5 Select <Delete> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Mode 1
<Apply>
<Delete>
No. of Copies: 1
Density: 0
+
-
6 Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
Delete?
NoYes
Calling and Copying Mode Memory
NOTE
Calling Mode Memory
• When a new Mode Memory is called, all copy settings are
replaced with that Mode Memory settings.
• After the Mode Memory is called, you can change and copy the
settings as you like.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK Start
COPY
1 Place your document.
“Placing Documents” (→P. 2-4)
“Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
2 Press [ ].
3 Select <Mode Memory> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Copy: Press Start
100% LTR
Erase Frame: Off
Sharpness: 0
Mode Memory: Off
11
+
-
4 Select a Mode Memory to call using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
* From Mode 1 to Mode 4, you cannot select any Mode Memory
which is not registered.
Mode Memory
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 4
5 Press [ ] (Start).
3-12
Copying
The default settings are a set of standard settings
predetermined by the machine. These settings become
effective when the machine is turned OFF and ON, or when
[] (Reset) is pressed to revert to the default settings. You
can change the following default settings based on your
needs.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <Copy Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Menu
Preferences
Timer Settings
Common Settings
Copy Settings
3 Select <Change Defaults> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Copy Settings
Change Defaults
4 Select the item using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Change Defaults
<Apply>
No. of Copies: 1
Density: 0
Original Type: Text
...
+
-
For more information, see “Copy Settings” (→P. 3-4).
5 Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] after you have
specified the setting and press [OK].
Change Defaults
<Apply>
No. of Copies: 1
Density: 0
Original Type: Text
...
+
-
6 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
Changing the Default Settings
3-13
Copying
You can confirm the settings of copy function which have been
changed from the default setting.
Keys to be used for this operation
Back View Settings
1 Press [ ] (View Settings).
The current settings in the machine are displayed.
* If you have not changed the default settings, the message <No
settings have been changed.> is displayed.
View Settings
Density: +1
Original Type: Text/
...
Sharpness: +1
2 Check your settings.
NOTE
You can change those settings
Select items and press [OK] to display a setting screen for those
items, where you can change those settings.
3 Press [ ] (Back) to return to the standby display.
Viewing Copy Settings
3-14
Copying
4-1
Chapter 4
Printing from a Computer
This chapter describes how to print from your computer to the machine.
* If you are a Macintosh user, see the following.
• To view how to install the Printer Driver
→ MF Driver Installation Guide or Printer Driver Guide
• To view how to use each function
→ Print Driver’s Help
To view how to display Printer Driver Guide or Help in the Printer Driver,
see “For Macintosh Users” (→P. 11-4).
Preparing to Print from Your Computer 4-2
Printing from a Computer 4-3
Scaling Documents 4-3
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet 4-3
1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing 4-4
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs 4-5
4-2
Printing from a Computer
To print your documents files from your computer, perform the following steps.
Step 1 Choose between USB and network connections.
Starter Guide → 4 Connecting to a Computer and
Installing the Drivers
Step 2 Install the printer driver.
NOTE
To change the port number of the machine
See the following section.
e-Manual→Security→Restricting Network Connections→Setting Protocol Port Numbers
Change printer settings on your computer when changing the port number of the machine.
e-Manual→Network Settings→Setting Up Your Computer to Print and Send Faxes (Windows Only)→Configuring Printer Settings on Your
Computer
About the printer driver
The printer driver is software required for printing from an application. The printer driver will convert application software’s print data to print data
for the printer.
The printer driver for this machine has the following features.
• The printer driver for this machine enables you to output print data at an optimum speed by dividing the workload using a computer and the
printer.
• As well as providing faster and more stable printing than conventional models, the printer driver for this machine uses less memory to operate.
• In addition to the conversion of print data, the printer driver for this machine is equipped with the functions capable of spooling print data and
configuring the print condition, and various types of print finishing can be set such as scaling or gutter adjustment.
Preparing to Print from Your Computer
4-3
Printing from a Computer
Scaling Documents
You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output
paper size.
There are two methods for scaling a document:
select the output size of the document to scale it
automatically, or specify the scaling value manually.
1 Click [Basic Settings].
NOTE
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see
“Printing” or “Configuring the Default Print Settings” in the e-Manual.
2 Select paper size of the document you created in
the application from [Page Size].
3 Select output size of the document from [Output
Size].
The document is scaled automatically according to the settings
made in [Page Size] and [Output Size].
4 If you want to increase or decrease the
magnification manually, select [Manual Scaling]
→ specify the scaling ratio for [Scaling].
5 Click [OK].
NOTE
• You can also configure this function in the [Page Setup] tab.
• Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are
using, you may not be able to magnify the document.
• Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not
be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for the
selected page size.
• The display may differ according to the operating system, as well
as the type and version of the printer driver.
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
Multiple pages can be printed on one sheet of paper.
1 Click [Basic Settings].
NOTE
For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen, see
“Printing” or “Configuring the Default Print Settings” in the e-Manual.
Printing from a Computer
4-4
Printing from a Computer
2 Select [N on 1] from [Page Layout] (where “N” is
the number of pages you want to print on the
sheet).
NOTE
If you cannot select the options for [Page Layout], display the
[Device Settings] tab, and then select [Auto] or [Enabled] from
[Spooling at Host]. For instructions on how to display the [Device
Settings] tab, see “Setting the Printer Options”in the e-Manual.
3 Select the page order from [Page Order].
The output image is displayed in the preview area.
4 Click [OK].
NOTE
• You can also configure this function in the [Page Setup] tab.
• You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this
function.
• Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies
depending on the application you are using, do not use it
together with this function. If you do, printing may not be
executed correctly.
• The display may differ according to the operating system, as well
as the type and version of the printer driver.
1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing
You can select whether to print on one side or both sides of
each sheet of paper. If the machine you are using supports
2-sided printing, the default setting is 2-sided printing.
IMPORTANT
Precautions on 2-sided printing
• Do not touch your document when making 2-sided printing
until the process is complete. After printing on the front side is
complete, the document is partially output, reserved, and fed
into the machine again for printing on the back side.
• Be sure to close the sub-output tray before making 2-sided
printing.
Printing to the back side of printed document
(Manual 2-sided printing)
2-sided printing can be performed manually using a printed
document. Place a printed document in the multi-purpose tray to
print on the back side*.
To print on the back side of a printed document, smooth out the
curling edges of the sheets and place them one by one in the
multi-purpose tray.
* This feature is supported only for sheets printed from this
machine. You cannot make a print on the printed side again.
1 According to the paper size for 2-sided printing,
ensure to set the paper size switch lever
accurately.
* If not securely attached, documents may not be fed properly, or
jammed.
(1) Open the lower rear cover.
(2) Securely place the blue color paper size switch lever (A).
• A4: Pull
• Letter, Legal: Push
(A)
(A)
(3) Close the lower rear cover.
4-5
Printing from a Computer
2 Click [Basic Settings].
NOTE
• For instructions on how to display the printer driver screen,
see “Printing” or “Configuring the Default Print Settings” in the
e-Manual.
3 Select [1-sided Printing] or [2-sided Printing] from
[1-sided/2-sided/Booklet Printing].
4 Select the binding edge from [Binding Location].
The output image is displayed in the preview area.
5 Click [OK].
NOTE
• You can also configure this function in the [Finishing] tab.
• The display may differ according to the operating system, as well
as the type and version of the printer driver.
Checking and Canceling Print Jobs
You can check detailed information about print jobs or cancel
print jobs in the middle of currently printing or waiting.
NOTE
If the Processing/Data Indicator on the operation panel
is:
Turned on/blinking A job is being processed.
Turned off No jobs are in the memory.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Status Monitor/Cancel
1 Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Select <Copy/Print Job> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Status Monitor/Cancel
Device Status
Copy/Print Job
TX Job
RX Job
3 Select <Job Status> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Copy/Print Job
Job Status
Copy Job History
Print Job History
4 Select a job to be checked or canceled using [ ]
or [ ] and press [OK].
Copy/Print Job Status
09:42AM Printing
09:43AM Waiting
The detailed information is displayed.
Details
<Cancel>
Job Number: 0020
Status: Printing
Time: 01/01 09:42AM
4-6
Printing from a Computer
●For canceling
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Details
<Cancel>
Job Number: 0020
Status: Printing
Time: 01/01 09:42AM
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
The print job is canceled.
Cancel?
NoYes
(3) Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.
NOTE
Pressing [ ] (Stop) can also delete the print jobs
You can delete the print job also by pressing [ ] (Stop).
* Press [ ] (Stop) twice to cancel the job when the machine
holds one job only.
●For checking only
Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.
5-1
Chapter 5
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
(D1370/D1350 Only)
This chapter describes the procedures for registering destinations in the address book and
changing or deleting the registered settings.
Registering Destinations in the Address Book 5-2
One-touch keys 5-2
Coded dial 5-2
Group dialing 5-2
Registering and Editing One-Touch Keys 5-3
Registering and Editing from the Operation Panel 5-3
Registering and Editing One-Touch Keys using the Remote UI 5-5
Registering and Editing Coded Dial Codes 5-6
Registering and Editing from the Operation Panel 5-6
Registering and Editing a Coded Dial Code Using the Remote UI 5-8
Registering and Editing Destinations for Group
Dialing 5-9
Registering and Editing a Destination Group from the Operation
Panel 5-9
Registering and Editing a Destination Group Using the Remote UI 5-12
5-2
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Specify a destination by manually entering characters/
numbers using the numeric keys or selecting from the address
book to fax a document.
You can register frequently used destinations in one-touch
keys and coded dial codes.
You can also save one-touch keys and coded dial codes as a
group.
You can register destinations from the operation panel or
Remote UI.
One-touch keys
You can register up to 19 destinations in one-touch keys.
Once the destinations have been registered, you can press the
appropriate one-touch key to select the destination.
“Registering and Editing One-Touch Keys” (→P. 5-3)
Coded dial
You can register up to 181 destinations in coded dial codes.
Once the destinations have been registered, you can press the
appropriate coded dial code to select the destination.
“Registering and Editing Coded Dial Codes” (→P. 5-6)
Group dialing
You can specify up to 199 registered destinations as a group
address in one-touch keys and coded dial codes. Group
addresses need to be registered in unused one-touch keys or
coded dial codes. All you need to do is to select a key or code
to specify group addresses.
“Registering and Editing Destinations for Group Dialing”
(→P. 5-9)
NOTE
Saving/Reading the address book
The address book can be saved as a file to your computer using the
Remote UI. The machine can read the file saved to your computer.
e-Manual→Setting and Managing from Computer→Import/
Export the Settings
You cannot edit the address book saved as a file.
Viewing destinations registered in the address book
You can view destinations by printing destination lists.
e-Manual→Basic Operation→Printing the List→Printing the
Address Book List (D1370/D1350 Only)
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
5-3
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
You can perform the following tasks.
• Registering one-touch keys
• Editing one-touch keys
• Deleting one-touch keys
Registering and Editing from the
Operation Panel
Keys to be used for this operation
FAX SCAN Tone,
Numeric keys
Address Book
OK
Back
1 Press [ ] or [ ].
2 Press [ ] (Address Book).
●To register a new one-touch key
(1) When destinations are already registered in the one-
touch key, press [ ].
To register a destination for the first time, proceed to Step
(2).
(2) Select <Register New Destination to Address Book> using
[ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Register New Destina
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
All A-Z
When the address book PIN is selected
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].
Address Book PIN
(Apply: Press OK)
*******
(3) Select <One-Touch> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Register Location
Coded Dial
One-Touch
(4) Select <Fax> or <E-Mail> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Destination Type
Fax
E-Mail
Group
(5) Select the number to be registered using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Enter Registration No.
01 Not Registered
02 Not Registered
03 Not Registered
04 Not Registered
(6) Select <Name> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Fax
<Apply>
Type: Fax
Name:
Destination:
(7) Use the numeric keys to specify <Name>.
“Entering Text” (→P. 1-9)
Name (Max 16 char.)
CANON
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
(8) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Name (Max 16 char.)
CANON
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
(9) Select <Destination> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Fax
<Apply>
Type: Fax
Name: CANON
Destination:
(10) Use the numeric keys to specify <Destination>.
If you select <Fax> in Step 4, press [OK] to specify <Set
Details> if necessary.
Destination (Max 40)
0123456789
<Apply>
Set Details
(11) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Destination (Max 40)
0123456789
<Apply>
Set Details
(12) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Fax
<Apply>
Type: Fax
Name: CANON
Destination: 012345
...
Registering and Editing One-Touch Keys
5-4
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
●To edit a one-touch key
(1) Press [ ].
Register New Destina
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
All A-Z
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Register New Destin
...
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
All A-Z
When the address book PIN is selected
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].
Address Book PIN
(Apply: Press OK)
*******
(3) Select the destination that you want to edit using [ ] or
[] and press [OK].
CANON 0123456789
All A-Z 0-9
(4) Select the item that you want to edit using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
• Type
• Name
• Destination
• One-Touch
Fax
<Apply>
Type: Fax
Name: CANON
Destination: 0123456
(5) When the edit is complete, select <Apply> using [ ] or
[ ] and press [OK].
(6) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Fax
<Apply>
Type: Fax
Name: CANON
Destination: 012345
...
●To delete a one-touch key
(1) Press [ ].
Register New Destina
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
All A-Z
(2) Select <Delete From Address Book> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
Delete From Address
All A-Z
When the address book PIN is selected
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].
Address Book PIN
(Apply: Press OK)
*******
(3) Select the destination that you want to delete using [ ]
or [ ] and press [OK].
CANON 0123456789
All A-Z 0-9
(4) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
Delete from
Address Book?
NoYes
3 Press [ ] (Back) to close the menu screen.
5-5
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering and Editing One-Touch Keys
using the Remote UI
1 Start the Web browser.
2 Enter “http://IP address of the machine/” in the
address field and press the [ENTER] key on the
keyboard.
Input Example: “http://192.168.0.215/”
3 Log on to the Remote UI.
(1) Select [Management Mode].
(2) Enter [System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN].
(3) Click [Log In].
(1) (2)
(3)
4 Click [Address Book].
5 Click [One-Touch].
To register a one-touch key
Proceed to Step 6.
To edit the registered one-touch key
(1) Click [No.], [Type] or [Name].
(2) Click [Edit].
(3) Specify the required settings in the edit screen and click [OK].
To delete the registered one-touch key
Click [Delete] of the destination which you want to delete.
6 Click the unregistered [No.], [Type] or [Name].
7 Select [Destination Type to Register] and click
[OK].
8 Specify the required settings and click [OK].
5-6
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
You can perform the following tasks.
• Registering coded dial codes
• Editing coded dial codes
• Deleting coded dial codes
Registering and Editing from the
Operation Panel
Keys to be used for this operation
FAX SCAN Tone,
Numeric keys
Address Book
OK
Back
1 Press [ ] or [ ].
2 Press [ ] (Address Book).
●To register a new coded dial code
(1) When destinations are already registered in the coded
dial code, press [ ].
To register a destination for the first time, proceed to Step
(2).
(2) Select <Register New Destination to Address Book> using
[ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Register New Destina
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
All A-Z
When the address book PIN is selected
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].
Address Book PIN
(Apply: Press OK)
*******
(3) Select <Coded Dial> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Register Location
Coded Dial
One-Touch
(4) Select <Fax> or <E-Mail> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Destination Type
Fax
E-Mail
Group
(5) Select <Name> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Fax
<Apply>
Type: Fax
Name:
Destination:
(6) Use the numeric keys to specify <Name>.
“Entering Text” (→P. 1-9)
Name (Max 16 char.)
CANON
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
(7) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Name (Max 16 char.)
CANON
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
(8) Select <Destination> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Fax
<Apply>
Type: Fax
Name: CANON
Destination:
(9) Use the numeric keys to specify <Destination>.
If you selected <Fax> in Step 4, press [OK] to specify <Set
Details> if necessary.
Destination (Max 40)
0123456789
<Apply>
Set Details
(10) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Destination (Max 40)
0123456789
<Apply>
Set Details
(11) Select <Coded Dial> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Fax
Type: Fax
Name: CANON
Destination: 012345
...
Coded Dial: 001
(12) Select the number to be registered using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Enter Registration No.
001 Not Registered
002 Not Registered
003 Not Registered
004 Not Registered
Registering and Editing Coded Dial Codes
5-7
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
(13) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Fax
<Apply>
Type: Fax
Name: CANON
Destination: 012345
...
●To edit a coded dial code
(1) Press [ ].
Register New Destina
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
All A-Z
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Register New Destin
...
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
All A-Z
When the address book PIN is selected
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].
Address Book PIN
(Apply: Press OK)
*******
(3) Select the destination that you want to edit using [ ] or
[ ] and press [OK].
CANON 0123456789
All A-Z 0-9
(4) Select the item that you want to edit using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
• Type
• Name
• Destination
• Coded Dial
Fax
Type: Fax
Name: CANON02
Destination: 987654
...
Coded Dial: 002
(5) When the edit is complete, select <Apply> using [ ] or
[ ] and press [OK].
(6) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ]and press [OK].
Fax
<Apply>
Type: Fax
Name: CANON02
Destination: 987654
...
●To delete a coded dial code
(1) Press [ ].
Register New Destina
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
All A-Z
(2) Select <Delete From Address Book> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
Delete From Address
All A-Z
When the address book PIN is selected
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].
Address Book PIN
(Apply: Press OK)
*******
(3) Select the destination that you want to delete using [ ]
or [ ] and press [OK].
CANON 0123456789
All A-Z 0-9
(4) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
Delete from
Address Book?
NoYes
3 Press [ ](Back) to close the menu screen.
5-8
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
Registering and Editing a Coded Dial Code
Using the Remote UI
1 Start the Web browser.
2 Enter “http://IP address of the machine/” in the
address field and press the [ENTER] key on the
keyboard.
Input Example: “http://192.168.0.215/”
3 Log on to the Remote UI.
(1) Select [Management Mode].
(2) Enter [System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN].
(3) Click [Log In].
(1) (2)
(3)
4 Click [Address Book].
5 Click [Coded Dial].
To register a coded dial
Proceed to Step 6.
To edit the registered coded dial
(1) Click [No.], [Type] or [Name].
(2) Click [Edit].
(3) Specify the required settings in the edit screen and click [OK].
To delete the registered coded dial
Click [Delete] of the destination which you want to delete.
6 Click the unregistered [No.], [Type] or [Name].
7 Select [Destination Type to Register] and click
[OK].
8 Specify the required settings and click [OK].
5-9
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
You can perform the following tasks.
• Registering group addresses
• Adding destination(s) to a group
• Deleting destination(s) from a group
• Changing the group name
• Deleting group(s)
IMPORTANT
Before registering group addresses
• Register group addresses in unused one-touch keys or coded
dial codes. Leave some one-touch keys or coded dials unused for
group dialing.
• Destinations must be registered in one-touch keys or coded dial
codes before they are added to a group.
Registering and Editing a Destination
Group from the Operation Panel
Keys to be used for this operation
FAX SCAN Tone,
Numeric keys
Address Book
OK
Back
1 Press [ ] or [ ].
2 Press [ ] (Address Book).
CANON01 012345678
CANON02 98765432
...
CANON03 00112233
...
All A-Z
●To register new group addresses
(1) Press [ ].
(2) Select <Register New Destination to Address Book> using
[] or [ ] and press [OK].
Register New Destina
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
All A-Z
When the address book PIN is selected
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].
Address Book PIN
(Apply: Press OK)
*******
(3) Select <One-Touch> or <Coded Dial> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Register Location
Coded Dial
One-Touch
(4) Select <Group> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Destination Type
Fax
E-Mail
Group
(5) If you selected <One-Touch> in Step (3), select the
number to be registered using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Enter Registration No.
01 CANON01 01234
...
02 CANON02 98765
...
03 Not Registered
04 Not Registered
(6) Select <Name> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Group
<Apply>
Type: Group
Name:
Destinations: 0
(7) Use the numeric keys to specify <Name>.
“Entering Text” (→P. 1-9)
Name (Max 16 char.)
CANON
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
(8) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Name (Max 16 char.)
CANON
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
(9) Select <Destinations> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Group
<Apply>
Type: Group
Name: CANON
Destinations: 0
(10) Select <Add> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Destination(s)
<Apply>
<Add>
Registering and Editing Destinations for Group Dialing
5-10
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
(11) Select the destination that you want to add using [ ] or
[ ] and press [OK].
CANON01 012345678
CANON02 98765432
...
CANON03 00112233
...
A-Z 0-9All
(12) Repeat Steps (10) and (11) to select the destinations to be
added.
(13) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Destination(s)
<Apply>
<Add>
CANON01 0123456789
CANON02 9876543210
(14) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Group
<Apply>
Type: Group
Name: CANON
Destinations: 2
●To add destination(s) to a group
(1) Press [ ].
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Register New Destin
...
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
All A-Z
When the address book PIN is selected
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].
Address Book PIN
(Apply: Press OK)
*******
(3) Select the group to be edited using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
CANON 2 Destinat
CANON01 0123456
...
CANON02 9876543
...
A-Z 0-9All
(4) Select <Destinations> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Group
<Apply>
Type: Group
Name: CANON
Destinations: 2
(5) Select <Add> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Destination(s)
<Apply>
<Add>
CANON01 0123456789
CANON02 9876543210
(6) Select the destination to be added using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
CANON01 01234567
...
CANON02 98765432
...
CANON03 001122334
A-Z 0-9All
(7) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Destination(s)
<Apply>
<Add>
CANON01 01234567
...
CANON02 98765432
...
(8) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Group
<Apply>
Type: Group
Name: CANON
Destinations: 3
●To delete destination(s) from a group
(1) Press [ ].
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Register New Destin
...
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
All A-Z
When the address book PIN is selected
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].
Address Book PIN
(Apply: Press OK)
*******
(3) Select the group to be edited using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
CANON 3 Destinat
CANON01 0123456
...
CANON02 9876543
...
A-Z 0-9All
5-11
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
(4) Select <Destinations> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Group
<Apply>
Type: Group
Name: CANON
Destinations: 3
(5) Select the destination to be deleted using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Destination(s)
<Add>
CANON01 01234567
...
CANON02 98765432
...
CANON03 001122334
(6) Select <Delete From Group> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Fax
<Delete From Group>
Name: CANON03
Destination: 0011223
...
Coded Dial: 001
(7) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
Delete from group?
NoYes
(8) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Destination(s)
<Apply>
<Add>
CANON01 0123456789
CANON02 9876543210
(9) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ]and press [OK].
Group
<Apply>
Type: Group
Name: CANON
Destinations: 2
●To change the name of a group
(1) Press [ ].
(2) Select <Edit Address Book> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Register New Destin
...
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
All A-Z
When the address book PIN is selected
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].
Address Book PIN
(Apply: Press OK)
*******
(3) Select the group of which name will be changed using
[ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
CANON 2 Destinat
CANON01 0123456
...
CANON02 9876543
...
A-Z 0-9All
(4) Select <Name> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Group
<Apply>
Type: Group
Name: CANON
Destinations: 2
(5) Change <Name>.
“Entering Text” (→P. 1-9)
Name (Max 16 char.)
CANON A
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
(6) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Name (Max 16 char.)
CANON A
<Apply>
Entry Mode: A
(7) Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Group
<Apply>
Type: Group
Name: CANON A
Destinations: 2
●To delete group(s)
(1) Press [ ].
(2) Select <Delete From Address Book> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Edit Address Book
Address Book Details
Delete From Address
All A-Z
When the address book PIN is selected
Use the numeric keys to enter the PIN and press [OK].
Address Book PIN
(Apply: Press OK)
*******
(3) Select the group that you want to delete using [ ] or
[ ] and press [OK].
CANON 3 Destinat
CANON01 0123456
...
CANON02 9876543
...
A-Z 0-9All
5-12
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
(4) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
Delete from
Address Book?
NoYes
3 Press [ ] (Back) to close the menu screen.
Registering and Editing a Destination
Group Using the Remote UI
1 Start the Web browser.
2 Enter “http://IP address of the machine/” in the
address field and press the [ENTER] key on the
keyboard.
Input Example: “http://192.168.0.215/”
3 Log on to the Remote UI.
(1) Select [Management Mode].
(2) Enter [System Manager ID] and [System Manager PIN].
(3) Click [Log In].
(1) (2)
(3)
4 Click [Address Book].
5 Click [One-Touch] or [Coded Dial].
5-13
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
●To register a group dial
Proceed to Step 6.
●To add destination(s) to the registered group dial
(1) Click [No.], [Type] or [Name].
(2) Click [Edit].
(3) Click [Select from Address Book].
(4) Click [One-Touch] or [Coded Dial] from the drop-down list
and click [Display].
(5) Select the check box of the destination which you want
to add to the group and click [OK].
(6) Make sure the destination you registered is displayed in
[Members List] and click [OK].
●To delete destination(s) from the registered group dial
(1) Click [No.], [Type] or [Name].
(2) Click [Edit].
(3) Select the destination to be deleted from [Members List]
and click [Delete].
(4) Click [OK].
●To change the name of the registered group dial
(1) Click [No.], [Type] or [Name].
(2) Click [Edit].
(3) Change the name of [Group Name] and click [OK].
●To delete the registered group dial
Click [Delete] of the group dial which you want to delete.
6 Click the unregistered [No.], [Type] or [Name].
7 Select [Group] in [Destination Type to Register]
and click [OK].
8 Enter the group name in [Group Name] and click
[Select from Address Book].
9 Select the destination(s) to be registered in this
group.
(1) Select [One-Touch] or [Coded Dial] from the drop-down
list and click [Display].
(2) Select the check box of the destination which you want
to register in the group.
(3) Click [OK].
(1)
(2)
(3)
10
Make sure that the destination you registered is
displayed in [Members List] and click [OK].
5-14
Registering Destinations in the Address Book
6-1
Chapter 6
Using the Fax Functions (D1370/D1350 Only)
This section describes how to send faxes from the machine and specify the related settings
to send and receive faxes.
Managing Faxes Stored in Memory 6-18
Checking and Canceling Fax Jobs 6-18
Combining and Printing the Received Documents You Saved 6-18
Checking and Deleting Received Faxes 6-19
Checking the History of Received/Sent Faxes 6-20
Changing the Default Fax Settings 6-21
Changing Fax Settings (Settings that Can Be Specified Using
the [Menu] Button) 6-22
The steps to take for configuring the send settings 6-22
Options 6-22
Register Unit Telephone Number 6-23
Select Line Type 6-23
Off-Hook Alarm 6-23
Change Defaults 6-23
Register Unit Name (Fax) 6-23
ECM TX 6-23
Pause Time 6-23
Auto Redial 6-24
Sender ID 6-24
Check Dial Tone Before Sending 6-24
The steps to take for configuring the receiving settings 6-24
Options 6-25
ECM RX 6-25
Incoming Ring 6-25
Remote RX 6-25
Auto RX Switch 6-25
2-Sided Printing 6-25
Reduce RX Size 6-26
RX Page Footer 6-26
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low 6-26
The steps to take for configuring the system settings 6-26
Options 6-27
TX Start Speed 6-27
RX Start Speed 6-27
Memory Lock Settings 6-27
Select Country/Region 6-27
Address Book PIN 6-27
Restrict New Destinations 6-28
Allow Fax Driver TX 6-28
Restrict History TX 6-28
Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry 6-28
One-TouchCoded Dial TX Confirmation 6-28
Restrict Sequential Broadcast 6-28
Basic Procedures for Sending Faxes 6-2
Changing the Scan Settings (Fax) 6-3
Resolution Settings 6-3
Density Settings 6-3
2-Sided Original 6-3
Sharpness Settings 6-3
Specifying Destinations 6-4
Specifying destinations by entering the fax number 6-4
Specifying destinations using one-touch keys 6-4
Specifying destinations using coded dial codes 6-4
Specifying destinations using group addresses 6-5
Specifying destinations using the address book 6-5
Canceling Fax Jobs 6-6
Redialing (Manual Redialing) 6-7
Useful Features 6-8
Notifying the Recipient of an Incoming Fax by Telephone
(Manual Sending) 6-8
Push-button Telephone for Tone Dialing 6-8
Sending a Fax Abroad (Adding Pauses) 6-9
Sending to Multiple Destinations at a Time
(Sequential Broadcast) 6-10
RX Mode 6-11
RX Mode 6-11
Auto mode 6-11
Fax/Tel mode 6-12
Answer mode 6-13
Manual mode 6-13
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) mode 6-13
Changing the Receive Mode 6-14
Advanced Settings for the Fax/Tel Auto Switch Mode 6-14
Forwarding Fax Documents 6-15
Setting Document Transfer (Automatic Forwarding) 6-15
Forwarding Received Faxes Stored in Memory to Other Destinations
(Manual Forwarding) 6-15
Configurating Operations for Transfer Errors 6-16
Re-fowarding/Printing/Deleting Documents in Which Transfer Is
Failed 6-17
6-2
Using the Fax Functions
Basic Procedures for Sending Faxes
This section describes the basic procedure for sending faxes.
1
Place your document.
“Placing Documents” (→P. 2-4)
“Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
2
Press [ ].
4
Specify the destination.
These are the following methods to specify a destination.
(For details, see P.6-4 to 6-5.)
Entering the fax number
One-touch keys
Coded dial codes
Group dialing
Address book
- Sequential broadcast
(→P.6-10)
When the destination confirmation screen is displayed
After confirming details of the destination, press [OK] to proceed to
the next step.
One-Touch: 01
Name: Canon
Dest.: 0123456789
OK Cancel
Coded Dial: 001
Name: Canon
Dest.: 0123456789
OK Cancel
* If <One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Confirmation> is set to <On> and
the destination is specified by One-Touch keys or Coded dialing
codes, the screen is displayed.
5
Press [ ] (Start).
When your document is placed in the feeder
The scan starts. Your document is sent to the destination when the
scan is complete.
When your document is placed on the platen glass
Perform the following procedure.
(1) Select the size of the original document using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Scan Size
LTR
LGL
STMT
(2) Place the next page on the platen glass and press [ ] (Start).
Press [ ] (Start) for each page.
(3) When all documents are scanned completely, select <Start
Sending> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Your document is sent to your fax destination.
3
Specify the scanning settings as needed.
There are the three items you can specify.
(For details, see P.6-3.)
Resolution
Density
2-Sided Original
Sharpness
The settings specified here are effective only for the
current sending operation. To make the settings
effective for all the fax operations, see “Changing the
Default Fax Settings” (→P. 6-21).
6-3
Using the Fax Functions
Changing the Scan Settings (Fax)
Resolution Settings
Fax mode screen Setting screen
Resolution
200 x 100 dpi (Norma
200 x 200 dpi (Fine)
200 x 200 dpi (Phot
...
200 x 400 dpi (Supe
...
Specify destination.
01/01/2011 12:52AM
RX Mode: Auto
Resolution: 200 x 10
Select <Resolution> using [ ] or [ ]
Specify the resolution.
Higher resolutions result in better image quality
but require longer transmission times.
<200 x 100 dpi (Normal)> For faxes that contain text
<200 x 200 dpi (Fine)> For faxes that contain fine text
<200 x 200 dpi (Photo)> For faxes that contain photographs
<200 x 400 dpi (Superfine)> Achieves an even finer resolution than (Fine)
<400 x 400 dpi (Ultrafine)> Achieves an even finer resolution than (Superfine)
Density Settings
Fax mode screen Setting screen
Specify destination.
01/01/2011 12:52AM
Resolution: 200 x 1
...
Density: 0
Density
- +
+
-
Select <Density> using [ ] or [ ]
Specify the density.
[ ] Decrease the density.
[ ] Increase the density.
Sharpness Settings
Fax mode screen Setting screen
Specify destination.
01/01/2011 12:52AM
2-Sided Original: O
...
Sharpness: 0
Sharpness
- +
+
-
Select <Sharpness> using [ ] or [ ]
Adjust this setting to emphasize the outline of
the image or decrease the contrast.
[ ] To clearly capture halftone photos, adjust this setting to the appropriate level on the <-> scale.
This can counteract the effect of moiré patterns (uneven gradation and striped patterns).
[ ] To clearly capture text or lines, adjust this setting to the appropriate level on the <+> scale. It is best suited for
scanning blueprints and very weak pencil manuscripts.
2-Sided Original
Set the scan settings for 2-sided original documents.
Specify destination.
01/01/2011 12:52AM
Density: 0
2-Sided Original: 0f
+
-
Press [ ] or [ ] to select <2-Sided Original>.
2-Sided Original
Off
Book Type
Calendar Type
<Off> The direction of 2-sided original
documents are not set.
<Book Type> Select this setting if the top and
bottom of the images are the
same on both pages.
<Calendar Type> Select this setting if the top and
bottom of the images on each
page are opposite each other.
6-4
Using the Fax Functions
Specifying Destinations
Specifying Destinations
Specifying destinations by entering the fax number
Specifying destinations using one-touch keys
Specify the fax number using the numeric keys, [ ] (Tone), and [ ]
(SYMBOLS).
Press the one-touch key (01 to 19) in which the destination is registered.
To select a destination from the one-touch keys, you need to register
destinations in these keys in advance.
“Registering and Editing One-Touch Keys” (→P. 5-3)
To modify destinations
• To cancel the entered destination
Press and hold [ ] (Clear).
• To delete the last character of the entered
destination
Press [ ] (Clear).
When the wrong key is pressed
(1) Press [ ] (Clear).
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
* To clear all the scan settings specified, press [ ] (Reset).
Specifying destinations using coded dial codes
Press [ ] (Coded Dial), and then enter the three-digit registration number
(001 to 181) with the numeric keys.
To select a destination from the coded dial codes, you need to register
destinations in these codes in advance.
“Registering and Editing Coded Dial Codes” (→P. 5-6)
When the wrong key is pressed
(1) Press [ ] (Clear).
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
* To clear all the scan settings specified, press [ ] (Reset).
6-5
Using the Fax Functions
Specifying Destinations
Specifying destinations using the address book
When you type an alphanumeric character from the operation panel or search for an alphanumeric character in the
address book screen, fax numbers with the matched letter or number are displayed. You can select your destination from
the displayed numbers.
To select a destination from the address book, you need to register destinations in the address book in advance.
“Registering Destinations in the Address Book” (→P. 5-2)
1 Press [ ]
2 Press [ ] (Address Book).
3 Press [ ] or [ ] to search for your
destination.
• Select <All> to display all destinations.
• Select < > at the bottom of the screen to add or edit
destinations.
“Registering Destinations in the Address Book (D1370/
D1350 Only)” (→P. 5-2)
CANON01 01234567
CANON02 9876543
...
CANON03 0011223
...
All A-Z
4 Select the destination using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
CANON01 0123456
...
CANON02 9876543
...
CANON03 00112233
All A-Z
Specifying destinations using group addresses
When group addresses are registered in coded dial codes
Press [ ] (Coded Dial), and then enter the three-digit registration number (001 to 181) with the numeric keys.
When group addresses are registered in one-touch keys
Press the one-touch key (01 to 19) in which the group address that you
want to select is registered.
To select a destination from the coded dial codes, you need to register
group addresses in these codes in advance.
“Registering and Editing Destinations for Group Dialing” (→P. 5-9)
When the wrong key is pressed
(1) Press [ ] (Clear).
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
* To clear all the scan settings specified, press [ ] (Reset).
6-6
Using the Fax Functions
Cancel sending the job currently being sent.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Stop
NOTE
How to cancel fax sending
You can also cancel the job with the following procedures.
• To cancel the job in the Status Monitor/Cancel screen.
“Checking and Canceling Fax Jobs” (→P. 6-18)
• Press [ ] (Stop) twice.
1 When <Scanning...> is displayed after the fax
sending starts, select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Scanning...
<Start Sending>
<Cancel>
Destinations: 1
No. of TX Pages: 1
* You can also cancel the job by pressing [ ] (Stop).
When a document is loaded on the platen glass
When <Scan Next: Press Start> is displayed, follow the same steps
as the above.
Scan Next: Press Start
<Start Sending>
<Cancel>
Destinations: 1
No. of TX Pages: 1
2 Select <Yes> using [ ] or [ ] when <Cancel?>
appears on the screen and press [OK].
* You can also cancel the job by pressing [ ] (Stop).
The job is canceled.
Cancel?
<No>
<Yes>
Details
Canceling Fax Jobs
6-7
Using the Fax Functions
You can call and redial up to three fax sending history.
Keys to be used for this operation
Recall
OK Start
FAX
1 Place your document.
“Placing Documents” (→P. 2-4)
“Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
2 Press [ ].
3 Press [ ] (Recall).
4 Select history for redial using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
In the history, recipient name and/or telephone number are
displayed. For sequential broadcast, only one content is displayed.
Recall
012XXXXXX
5 Press [ ] (Start).
NOTE
Contents saved in the fax sending history
The sequential broadcast destinations are included. The following
reading settings are saved as well. You can change them for
redialing.
• Resolution
• Density
• 2-Sided Original
• Sharpness
Redial restrictions
• Manual fax sending is not saved in the history and cannot be
redialed.
“Notifying the Recipient of an Incoming Fax by Telephone
(Manual Sending)” (→P. 6-8)
• When fax sending from the history is restricted, redialing feature
is not available.
“Restrict History TX” (→P. 6-28)
• When <Restrict New Dest.> is set to <On>, the saved fax
sending history up to then is deleted for preventing those new
destinations in the history from being redialed.
“Restrict New Destinations” (→P. 6-28)
When the machine is turned OFF
Recently dialed numbers are all cleared.
To automatically redial a number
“Auto Redial” (→P. 6-24)
Redialing (Manual Redialing)
6-8
Using the Fax Functions
Notifying the Recipient of an Incoming
Fax by Telephone (Manual Sending)
Send a fax manually when
• you want to notify the recipient of an incoming fax by
telephone
• the receiving fax machine cannot receive faxes
automatically
Keys to be used for this operation
Start
FAX Numeric keys
1 Connect an external telephone to the machine.
For more information, see the Starter Guide that comes with the
machine.
2 Place your document in the feeder.
“Placing Documents” (→P. 2-4)
“Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
3 Press [ ].
4 Specify the scan settings.
You cannot scan the 2-sided printing document.
“Changing the Scan Settings (Fax)” (→P. 6-3)
5 Check for a dial tone via the handset of the
external telephone.
Check if you hear the dial tone.
6 Dial the recipient’s number.
7 Talk to the recipient through the handset.
When you hear a beep
Proceed to Step 9.
8 Ask the recipient to set his/her fax machine to
receive your fax.
9 When you hear a beep, press [ ] (Start), and
hang up the handset.
When the scan is complete, the machine is ready to send your faxes.
NOTE
Restrictions when sending faxes manually
When placing documents on the platen glass, only one page can be
sent. Furthermore, the group dialing function is not available.
• The 2-sided printing document cannot be scanned. (The 2-sided
printing scan setting will be invalid.)
Check for a dial tone before entering the number.
When the number is entered before checking for a dial tone, your call
cannot come through or may be connected to a wrong destination.
Push-button Telephone for Tone Dialing
Some types of push-button telephones require a push-button
line (for example, banks, airlines, or hotel reservations). When
the machine is connected to a dial-up line, you can receive a fax
using tone dialing. Follow the steps in the procedure below.
Keys to be used for this operation
Start
FAX Tone, Numeric keys
Hook
1 Press [ ].
2 Press [ ] (Hook) and check for the dial tone.
Check if you hear the dial tone.
3 Dial the information service from which you want
to receive fax(es) using the numeric keys.
Specify destination.
01/01/2011 12:52AM
012XXXXXX
Start Receiving
Resolution: 200 x 1
...
4 Respond to the prerecorded messages of the
information service and press [ ] (Tone).
You can switch to tone dialing.
Specify destination.
01/01/2011 12:52AM
012XXXXXXT
Start Receiving
Resolution: 200 x 1
...
5 Enter the required numbers using the numeric keys.
Specify destination.
01/01/2011 12:52AM
012XXXXXXT3456
Start Receiving
Resolution: 200 x 1
...
6 Press [ ] (Start) to receive fax(es).
NOTE
To make a telephone call
An external telephone must be connected to the machine.
Check for a dial tone before entering the number.
When the number is entered before checking for a dial tone,
your call cannot come through or may be connected to a wrong
destination.
Useful Features
6-9
Using the Fax Functions
Sending a Fax Abroad (Adding Pauses)
When making an overseas call, you may need to add a pause
to the fax number.
Since signals are transmitted over long distances across a
complicated channel, your call may not be connected without
adding a pause after the country code or in front of the fax
number. By adding a pause, enough time elapses before the
machine starts dialing the number again.
Keys to be used for this operation
Start
FAX
Pause
Tone, Numeric keys
1 Place your document.
“Placing Documents” (→P. 2-4)
“Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
2 Press [ ].
3 Specify the scanning settings as needed.
“Changing the Scan Settings (Fax)” (→P. 6-3)
4 Enter the international access code using the
numeric keys.
For more information on international access codes, contact your
telephone company.
Fax Number
012
<Apply>
5 Press [ ] (Pause) to enter a pause as needed.
• The letter <p> is displayed to indicate that a pause is added.
• The default pause length is two seconds*. To change it, see
“Pause Time” (→P. 6-23)
• To add more pauses into the dialing sequence, press [ ]
(Pause) again.
* The default pause length varies depending on the country
where you are using the machine.
Fax Number
012P
<Apply>
6 Enter the country code, the area code, and the
fax/telephone number using the numeric keys.
Fax Number
012p031XXXXXXX
<Apply>
7 Press [ ] (Pause) to add a pause to the end of
the fax/telephone number as needed.
• The letter <P> is displayed at the end of the fax number.
• A pause added to the end of the number is set to 10 seconds.
Fax Number
012p031XXXXXXXP
<Apply>
8 Press [ ] (Start).
6-10
Using the Fax Functions
Sending to Multiple Destinations at a
Time (Sequential Broadcast)
You can send the same fax to multiple destinations
simultaneously.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK Start
Numeric keys
1 Place your document.
“Placing Documents” (→P. 2-4)
“Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
2 Specify destination.
“Specifying Destinations” (→P. 6-4)
To specify destination, following methods are available.
• Specifying destinations by entering the fax number
• Specifying destinations using one-touch keys
• Specifying destinations using coded dial codes
• Specifying destinations using group addresses
• Specifying destinations using the address book
3 Select how to specify destinations that you want
to add using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
• Address Book
• Coded Dial
• Specify Next Destination (New)
“Specifying Destinations” (→P. 6-4)
4 Repeat Step 2 and 3 to enter all the destinations.
5 Press [ ] (Start).
NOTE
The number of destinations that you can specify for a
sequential broadcast
• Using the numeric keys: Up to 10 destinations
• One-touch keys: Up to 19 destinations
• Coded dial codes: Up to 181 destinations
To specify destinations using the numeric keys
Enter the numbers and press [OK].
For confirming/deleting/editing the specified
destinations
(1) Select <Confirm/Edit Destination> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Send: Press Start
Destinations: 3
0123456789
Specify Next Destin
...
Confirm/Edit Destina
(2) Select the destination using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Details of the destination are displayed.
Confirm/Edit Dest.
Canon 0987654321
User01 9876543210
0123456789
(3) In order to delete the destination, select <Delete Destination>
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
For editing destinations being entered using numeric
keys
Edit the destinations using numeric keys and select <Apply>
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
6-11
Using the Fax Functions
This section describes how to receive faxes.
RX Mode
The machine allows you to receive faxes automatically or manually in several different ways.
See the following flowcharts to select the receive mode that you want to use.
The default setting is <Auto>.
Auto mode
You can receive faxes automatically.
The receive mode varies depending on whether an external telephone is connected to the machine or not.
Operation for when an incoming call is received
Without an external telephone connected
When the call is a fax
When the call is a fax When the call is a faxWhen the call is a
voice call
When the call is a
voice call
When you pick up the handset while the
incoming call rings
When you do not pick up the handset while
the incoming call rings
When the call is a voice call
An incoming call rings for the specified number of times. *
The machine receives
the fax automatically. The machine does not respond.
You can start talking
as is.
The machine receives the
fax automatically. You cannot start talking.
With an external telephone connected
You can hear a
beep.Following the
procedure below, receive the
fax.
(1) Press [Fax].
(2) Select <Start Receiving>
using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
(3) Hang up the handset.
* You can set the incoming call ring time using “Incoming Ring” (→P. 6-25).
RX Mode
6-12
Using the Fax Functions
Fax/Tel mode
You can receive faxes automatically (The telephone rings on an incoming call). To disable audible incoming rings, see
“Incoming Ring” (→P. 6-25)
You can answer incoming calls by picking up the handset.
Operation for when an incoming call is received
An incoming call rings for the specified number of times.*1
When you do not pick up the handset
within the specified number of times
When you pick up the handset within
the specified number of times
When the call is a fax When the call
is a voice call
You can hear a
beep.Following the
procedure below, receive the
fax.
(1) Press [Fax].
(2) Select <Start Receiving>
using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
(3) Hang up the handset.
You can start
talking as is.
The machine judges whether the
incoming call is a fax or voice call.*2
When the call is
a fax
When the call is
a voice call
The machine receives
the fax automatically.
The telephone rings.*3
When you pick up the
handset during ringing
When you do not pick up
the handset during ringing
You can start talking as is. The machine hangs up the
telephone or switches to the fax
receive mode.*4
*1 You can change the incoming call ring time using “Incoming Ring” (→P. 6-25)
*2 To set a ring delay before the telephone starts ringing on an incoming call, go to the <Ring Start Time> option.
*3 To adjust the incoming call ring time, go to the <Incoming Ring Time> option.
*4 To specify how the machine behaves when you do not answer an incoming call, go to the <Action After Ring> option.
For more information on these options, see “Advanced Settings for the Fax/Tel Auto Switch Mode” (→P. 6-14)
6-13
Using the Fax Functions
Answer mode
You can receive faxes automatically.
The telephone’s built-in answer function records messages of unanswered calls.
The telephone rings the number of times specified for the built-in
answering machine.*1
When you pick up the handset during
ringing
When the built-in answering machine
starts up
When the call is a fax When the call is a
voice call
The built-in answering
machine records the
message.*2
You can start talking as
is.
When the call is a
voice call
When the call is a fax
The machine receives the
fax automatically.
Operation for when an incoming call is received
You can hear a
beep.Following the
procedure below, receive the
fax.
(1) Press [Fax].
(2) Select <Start Receiving>
using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
(3) Hang up the handset.
*1 Set the answer function to answer after a few rings.
*2 The message is recorded on the answer function (You are advised to add approximately 4 seconds of silence at the beginning
of the message or set the maximum recording time to 20 seconds).
Manual mode
Pick up the handset to answer calls or receive faxes when the machine is set to manual mode.
Set this mode when you expect to receive more incoming telephone calls than faxes or when you receive few faxes.
Operation for when an incoming call is received
The external phone rings.
When you pick up the handset while the
telephone rings
When the call is a fax When the call is a voice call
When you do not pick up the handset while
the telephone rings
The machine cannot receive a call or fax.*1
You can start talking as is.
You can hear a
beep.Following the
procedure below, receive the
fax.*2
(1) Press [Fax].
(2) Select <Start Receiving>
using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
(3) Hang up the handset.
*1 When “Auto RX Switch” (→P. 6-25) is set to <On> , the machine automatically starts receiving a fax after several rings.
*2 When “Remote RX” (→P. 6-25) is set, you can dial the telephone to receive faxes remotely.
DRPD (Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection) mode
This mode assigns distinctive ring patterns to up to two phone numbers per telephone line. The machine automatically
identifies incoming calls based on the ring pattern and sorts out whether an incoming call is a fax or voice call. Set the fax ring
pattern that matches the ring pattern of your telephone company. Contact your telephone company for more information.
6-14
Using the Fax Functions
Changing the Receive Mode
Select the receive mode that you want to use.
NOTE
About the external telephone
The machine may not be able to send or receive faxes properly,
depending on the type of telephone connected to it.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
FAX
1 Press [ ].
2 Select <RX Mode> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Specify destination.
01/01/2011 12:52AM
RX Mode: Auto
Resolution: 200 x 1
...
3 Select the receive mode using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
RX Mode
Auto
Fax/Tel Auto Switch
Manual
Answering Machine
When <Fax/Tel Auto Switch> is selected
Proceed to specify the advanced settings. See “Advanced Settings
for the Fax/Tel Auto Switch Mode” (→P. 6-14)
If you select <DRPD: Select Fax>
Select a ring pattern using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Advanced Settings for the Fax/Tel Auto
Switch Mode
Set the advanced settings for the Fax/Tel Auto Switch mode.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
FAX
1 Press [ ].
2 Select <RX Mode> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Specify destination.
01/01/2011 12:52AM
RX Mode: Auto
Resolution: 200 x 1
...
3 Select <Fax/Tel Auto Switch> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
RX Mode
Auto
Fax/Tel Auto Switch
Manual
Answering Machine
4 Select the option using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Fax/Tel Auto Switch
<Apply>
Ring Start Time: 6
Incoming Ring Time:
...
After Ring: RX
<Ring Start Time>
Set the duration during which the
machine tries to detect fax tones before
the telephone starts ringing.
Set the duration somewhere between 5 to
30 seconds and press [OK].
<Incoming Ring Time>
Set the duration during which the
telephone keeps ringing when an
incoming call comes.
Set the duration somewhere between 15
to 300 seconds and press [OK].
Action After Ring
Specify how the machine behaves when
an incoming call is not answered.
Select <End> or <RX> and press [OK].
- <End>: Disconnect the call.
- <RX>: Receive an incoming fax.
5 Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
The changes are saved.
Fax/Tel Auto Switch
<Apply>
Ring Start Time: 6
Incoming Ring Time:
...
After Ring: RX
6-15
Using the Fax Functions
Received fax documents are transferred to a fax, E-mail or a file
server.
NOTE
For forwarding to E-mail or a file server (D1370 Only)
When a fax document is transferred to an E-mail or a file server, the
document is converted to a PDF file.
When the destination is deleted from an address book
When you delete the destination from the address book between
the time the fax forward is configured and the time the fax is
received, a destination unknown forwarding error occurs.
To learn how to handle transfer errors
See the following sections.
“Configurating Operations for Transfer Errors” (→P. 6-16)
“Re-fowarding/Printing/Deleting Documents in Which Transfer Is
Failed ” (→P. 6-17)
Setting Document Transfer (Automatic
Forwarding)
Specify whether a document is automatically transferred
during receiving and where to be transferred.
NOTE
Destinations that can be specified
You can specify the followings as destinations.
• Fax
• E-mail (D1370 only)
• File server (D1370 only)
• Group destination”
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <System Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Menu
USB Direct Print Se
...
Printer Settings
Adjustment/Maintena
...
System Settings
3 Select <Forwarding Settings> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
System Settings
Security Settings
Communication Manag
...
Select Country/Regi
...
Forwarding Settings
4 Select <Off> or <On> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Forwarding Settings
Off
On
<On> Starts to transfer received documents. Next, you need to
configure transfer destinations.
<Off> Transfer is not performed.
When <On> is selected
You can specify where to forward. You can specify only by the
following approaches:
“Specifying destinations using one-touch keys” (→P. 6-4)
“Specifying destinations using coded dial codes” (→P. 6-4)
“Specifying destinations using the address book” (→P. 6-5)
CANON01 01234567
CANON02 9876543
...
CANON03 0011223
...
All 0-9A-Z
5 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
Forwarding Received Faxes Stored in Memory
to Other Destinations (Manual Forwarding)
When a fax is stored in memory, you can manually forward it to
a specified destination.
NOTE
Destinations that can be specified
You can specify the followings as destinations.
• Fax
• E-mail (D1370 only)
• File server (D1370 only)
• Group destination
Forwarding Fax Documents
6-16
Using the Fax Functions
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Status Monitor/Cancel
1 Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Select <RX Job> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Status Monitor/Cancel
Device Status
Copy/Print Job
TX Job
RX Job
3 Select <Job Status> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
RX Job Status/History
Job Status
Job History
4 Select the job that you want to forward using [ ]
or [ ] and press [OK].
You cannot forward received faxes when
• the machine is in the middle of receiving another fax
• the machine starts printing a job after it has received a fax
RX Job Status
12:52AM Receiving
12:54AM Waiting:Print
5 Select <Forward> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Details
<Delete>
<Forward>
Job Number: 0004
Status: Waiting to
...
6 Specify the forwarding destination.
See the following sections to specify destinations.
“Specifying destinations using one-touch keys” (→P. 6-4)
“Specifying destinations using coded dial codes” (→P. 6-4)
“Specifying destinations using the address book” (→P. 6-5)
CANON 0123456789
GroupA 2 Destin
...
User01 01234567
...
All A-Z
Configurating Operations for Transfer Errors
When received documents are transferred or when a transfer error
occurs, its details can be saved in a memory or printed.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <System Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Menu
USB Direct Print Se
...
Printer Settings
Adjustment/Maintena
...
System Settings
3 Select <Store/Print when Fowarding> using [ ]
or [ ] and press [OK].
System Settings
Communication Manag
...
Select Country/Regi
...
Forwarding Settings
Store/Print When Fow
To print a transferred document
(1) Select <Print Images> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Store/Print Forwarding
Print Images
Store Images in Memo
...
(2) Select settings using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Print Images
Off
On
Only When Error Occu
...
<Off> When a document is transferred, that
document is not printed.
<On> When a document is transferred, that
document is printed.
<Only when Error
Occurs>
Only when a transfer error occurs, that
document is printed.
6-17
Using the Fax Functions
To save a transferred document in a memory
(1) Select <Store Images in Memory> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Store/Print Forwarding
Print Images
Store Images in Memor
(2) Select settings using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Store Images in Memory
Do Not Store
Only When Error Occu
...
<Do Not Store> When a document is transferred, that
document is not saved.
<Only when Error
Occurs>
Only when a transfer error occurs, that
document is saved in a memory.
4 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
Re-fowarding/Printing/Deleting
Documents in Which Transfer Is Failed
NOTE
When You Use This Feature
Specify <Only when Error Occurs> to the <Store Images in
Memory> of the <Store/Print When Fowarding>.
“Configurating Operations for Transfer Errors” (→P. 6-16)
About re-forwarded job
The job which has been reforwarded successfully is deleted.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Status Monitor/Cancel
1 Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Select <Fax Forwarding Errors> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Status Monitor/Cancel
Copy/Print Job
TX Job
RX Job
Fax Forwarding Error
3 Select a job using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Fax Forwarding Errors
12:52AM
12:54AM
Detailed information of the forwarding error job is displayed.
Details
<Delete>
<Print>
<Forward>
Job Number: 0004
To delete/print a job
(1) Select <Delete> or <Print> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Details
<Delete>
<Print>
<Forward>
Job Number: 0004
<Delete> Press to delete jobs.
<Print> Print the job contents.
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
Delete?
NoYes
For job forwarding
(1) Select <Forward> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Details
<Delete>
<Print>
<Forward>
Job Number: 0004
(2) You can specify where to forward. You can specify only by the
following approaches:
“Specifying destinations using one-touch keys” (→P. 6-4)
“Specifying destinations using coded dial codes” (→P. 6-4)
“Specifying destinations using the address book” (→P. 6-5)
CANON01 01234567
CANON02 9876543
...
CANON03 0011223
...
All A-Z
6-18
Using the Fax Functions
Manage faxes stored in memory.
Checking and Canceling Fax Jobs
Check the details of the fax currently being sent or waiting to
be sent. Cancel faxes that you decide not to send.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Status Monitor/Cancel
1 Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Press [ ] or [ ] to select <TX Job> and press
[OK].
Status Monitor/Cancel
Device Status
Copy/Print Job
TX Job
RX Job
3 Select <Job Status> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
TX Job Status/History
Job Status
Job History
4 Press [ ] or [ ] to select the job that you want to
check or cancel and press [OK].
TX Job Status
12:52AM Sending
12:54AM Scanning
The details of the selected job is displayed.
Details
<Cancel>
Job Number: 0004
Status: Sending
Time: 01/01 12:52AM
To cancel the job
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Details
<Cancel>
Job Number: 0004
Status: Sending
Time: 01/01 12:52AM
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
Cancel?
NoYes
The sending job is canceled. Fax transmission to all the
destinations will be canceled for sequential broadcast.
(3) Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.
To only check the details of the selected job
Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) after you have checked the
details of the selected job to close the screen.
Combining and Printing the Received
Documents You Saved
Instead of printing at “Memory Lock Settings” (→P. 6-27) during
receiving, documents saved in a memory are combined and
printed altogether.
NOTE
Printing documents saved in a memory during receiving
You cannot individually choose and print a document. You cannot
preview the document content, either.
When <Memory Lock Time > is set
At <Memory Lock End Time>, you can combine and print received
documents saved in a memory from the <Memory Lock Start
Time> to the <Memory Lock End Time>.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu
Managing Faxes Stored in Memory
6-19
Using the Fax Functions
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <System Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Menu
USB Direct Print Se
...
Printer Settings
Adjustment/Maintena
...
System Settings
3 Select <Communication Management Settings>
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
System Settings
Device Information
...
Dept. ID Management
...
Security Settings
Communication Manage
4 Select <Memory Lock Settings> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
When <Memory Lock PIN> is set, enter the number using the
numeric keys and press [OK].
Communication Mgt. Set
Fax Settings
Memory Lock Settings
5 Select <Off> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Memory Lock Settings
Off
On
Fax documents saved in the memory are combined and printed.
6 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
Checking and Deleting Received Faxes
Check the details of faxes stored in memory. Delete faxes that
you no longer need.
NOTE
About faxes stored in memory
You can specify forwarding destinations.
“Forwarding Fax Documents” (→P. 6-15)
You can combine and print documents saved in the memory
Instead of printing during receiving.
“Combining and Printing the Received Documents You Saved”
(→P. 6-18)
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Status Monitor/Cancel
1 Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Select <RX Job> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Status Monitor/Cancel
Device Status
Copy/Print Job
TX Job
RX Job
3 Select <Job Status> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
RX Job Status/History
Job Status
Job History
4 Select the job that you want to check or delete
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
RX Job Status
12:52AM Receiving
12:54AM Waiting:Print
The details of the job is displayed.
Details
<Delete>
<Forward>
Job Number: 0004
Status:Waiting to...
6-20
Using the Fax Functions
To delete the job
(1) Select <Delete> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Details
<Delete>
<Forward>
Job Number: 0004
Status:Waiting to...
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
Delete?
NoYes
The job is deleted.
(3) Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the screen.
To only check the details of the selected job
Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) after you have checked the
details of the selected job to close the screen.
Checking the History of Received/Sent
Faxes
Check the history of received or sent faxes.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Status Monitor/Cancel
1 Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel).
2 Select <TX Job> or <RX Job> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Status Monitor/Cancel
Device Status
Copy/Print Job
TX Job
RX Job
<TX Job> Confirm the sending job history.
<RX Job> Confirm the received job history.
3 Select <Job History> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
TX Job Status/History
Job Status
Job History
4 Select the job that you want to check using [ ] or
[ ] and press [OK].
The details of the job is displayed.
TX Job History
05:10AM NG ♯995
05:06AM NG ♯099
5 Select the item that you want to check using [ ]
or [ ] and press [OK].
Details
Job Number: 0004
Result: NG ♯995
Started: 01/01 12:5
...
Duration: 00'00
6 Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) to close the
screen.
6-21
Using the Fax Functions
The default settings are a set of standard settings
predetermined by the machine. These settings become
effective when the machine is turned ON and OFF, or when
[ ] (Reset) is pressed to revert to the default settings.
You can change the following default settings based on your
needs.
• Resolution
• Density
• 2-Sided Original
• Sharpness
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <Fax Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Menu
Timer Settings
Common Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
3 Select <TX Function Settings> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Fax Settings
Basic Settings
TX Function Settings
RX Function Settings
RX Print Settings
4 Select <Change Defaults> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
TX Function Settings
Change Defaults
Register Unit Name
...
ECM TX
Pause Time
5 Select the item using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
• Resolution/Density/Sharpness
For more information, see “Changing the Scan Settings (Fax)”
(→P. 6-3)
Change Defaults
<Apply>
Resolution: 200 x 10
Density: 0
2-Sided Original: O
...
+
-
6 Select <Apply> using [ ] or [ ] after you have
specified the setting and press [OK].
Change Defaults
<Apply>
Resolution: 200 x 1
...
Density: 0
2-Sided Original: O
...
+
-
7 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
Changing the Default Fax Settings
6-22
Using the Fax Functions
Configure the following settings to determine how to send
faxes.
For details on the procedure for setting specifications or the
setting items, see the next items.
“The steps to take for configuring the send settings”
(→P. 6-22)
“Options” (→P. 6-22)
“The steps to take for configuring the receiving settings”
(→P. 6-24)
“Options” (→P. 6-25)
“The steps to take for configuring the system settings”
(→P. 6-26)
“Options” (→P. 6-27)
The steps to take for configuring the
send settings
Follow the steps in the procedure below to configure the send
settings.
The procedure describes the steps to change the “ECM TX”
setting.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <Fax Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Menu
Timer Settings
Common Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
3 Select <TX Function Settings> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Fax Settings
Basic Settings
TX Function Settings
RX Function Settings
RX Print Settings
4 Select <ECM TX> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
TX Function Settings
Change Defaults
Register Unit Name
...
ECM TX
Pause Time
5 Select <Off> or <On> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
ECM TX
Off
On
*
Select <Apply> when <Apply> appears on the screen after you
have specified the setting and press [OK].
6 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
The procedure is complete.
Options
Configure the following options to send a fax.
Fax Settings
Basic
Settings
“Register Unit Telephone Number” (→P. 6-23)
“Select Line Type” (→P. 6-23)
“Off-Hook Alarm” (→P. 6-23)
TX Function
Settings
“Change Defaults” (→P. 6-23)
“Register Unit Name (Fax)” (→P. 6-23)
“ECM TX” (→P. 6-23)
“Pause Time” (→P. 6-23)
“Auto Redial” (→P. 6-24)
“Sender ID” (→P. 6-24)
“Check Dial Tone Before Sending” (→P. 6-24)
Changing Fax Settings (Settings that Can Be Specified Using the [Menu] Button)
6-23
Using the Fax Functions
Register Unit Telephone Number
Register your machine’s fax number.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <Basic Settings> →
<Register Unit Telephone Number>
How to register the fax number
Enter up to 20 digits using the numeric keys.
You can also enter the [+].
Select Line Type
Change this option when you cannot send a fax.
Contact your local telephone company when you are not
sure of the line type that you are using.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <Basic Settings> →
<Select Line Type>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Pulse Select this setting when you are using a pulse line.
Tone Select this setting when you are using a tone line.
Off-Hook Alarm
Specify whether to sound an alarm when the telephone
handset is left unhooked and adjust the volume.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings>→ <Basic Settings> →
<Off-Hook Alarm>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off No alarm sounds.
On Off-Hook Alarm Volume:
1 to 3
The alarm sounds at the
specified volume.
Change Defaults
Change the default settings, which become effective
when the machine is turned ON and OFF or [ ] (Reset) is
pressed.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu)→ <Fax Settings> → <TX Function
Settings> → <Change Defaults>
Settings
See the following section for more information.
“Changing the Default Fax Settings” (→P. 6-21)
Register Unit Name (Fax)
Register your name or company’s name (sender’s name).
Once the information has been registered, it is printed at
the top of each page that you are sending.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <TX Function
Settings> → <Register Unit Name (Fax)>
How to register the sender’s name
Enter up to 24 alphanumeric characters.
“Entering Text” (→P. 1-9)
NOTE
Where the sender’s name appears on the page
The information is printed at the top of each page that you are
sending.
Sending Date/Time
Fax/Telephone Number
(FAX No.)
Page Number
Sender Name
(Unit Name)
Telephone Number
Mark
01/01/2011 02:07 PM FAX 123XXXXXXX CANON P.0001
ECM TX
The ECM (Error Correction Mode) detects and corrects
errors that occur during fax transmissions. It helps in
minimizing sending errors caused by a poor connection.
NOTE
Check if the ECM is enabled on the receiving fax
machine
The ECM is effective only when it is enabled on both machines.
An error occurs when the ECM is enabled
The error may be caused by poor telephone line conditions.
When telephone line conditions are poor
It may take additional time to send your fax if a problem occurs
when sending over the telephone line.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <TX Function
Settings> → <ECM TX>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off Disable the ECM.
On Enable the ECM.
Pause Time
Press [ ] (Pause) to specify the pause length.
For the instructions on how to enter a pause, see “Sending a
Fax Abroad (Adding Pauses)” (→P. 6-9)
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <TX Function
Settings> → <Pause Time>
Setting
(Bold: Default setting)
1 to 2 to 15
(seconds)
6-24
Using the Fax Functions
Auto Redial
Enable auto redial for automatically redialing the fax
number when the line is busy or a sending error occurs.
Specify the number of redial attempts and the interval
between these attempts.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <TX Function
Settings> → <Auto Redial>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off
Disable Auto Redial
See “Redialing (Manual
Redialing)” (→P. 6-7) to redial
the number manually.
On
Redial Times:
1 to 2 to 10 (times)
Set the number of redial
attempts.
Redial Interval:
2 to 99 (minutes)
Set the interval (in minutes)
between redial attempts.
Redial When Err Occurs:
Off, On
Specify whether to redial the
number when a sending error
occurs.
Sender ID
Specify whether to add the sender ID to the fax that you are
sending.
The sender ID is printed at the top of each page that you are
sending, along with the fax number and sender’s name. This
helps the recipient to identify the sender.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <TX Function
Settings> → <Sender ID>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off No sender ID is added.
On
Print Location:
On Image, Above Image
Select the location where the
sender ID is printed on the
page.
Mark No. as: TEL/FAX:
FAX, TEL
Select the symbol to be added
in front of the telephone
number.
Check Dial Tone Before Sending
Specify whether to check for a dial tone before dialing.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <TX Function
Settings> → <Check Dial Tone Before Sending>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off Do not check for a dial tone.
On Check for a dial tone before dialing.
The steps to take for configuring the
receiving settings
Follow the steps in the procedure below to configure the fax
receiving settings.
The procedure describes the steps to change the “ECM RX”
setting.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <Fax Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Menu
Timer Settings
Common Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
3 Select <RX Function Settings> using [ ] or [ ]
and press [OK].
Fax Settings
Basic Settings
TX Function Settings
RX Function Settings
RX Print Settings
4 Select <ECM RX> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
RX Function Settings
ECM RX
Incoming Ring
Remote RX
Auto RX Switch
5 Select <Off> or <On> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
ECM RX
Off
On
* Select <Apply> when <Apply> appears on the screen after you
have specified the setting and press [OK].
6 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
The procedure is complete.
6-25
Using the Fax Functions
Options
Configure the following options to receive a fax.
Fax Settings
RX
Function
Settings
“ECM RX” (→P. 6-25)
“Incoming Ring” (→P. 6-25)
“Remote RX” (→P. 6-25)
“Auto RX Switch” (→P. 6-25)
RX Print
Settings
“2-Sided Printing” (→P. 6-25)
“Reduce RX Size” (→P. 6-26)
“RX Page Footer” (→P. 6-26)
“Continue Printing When Toner Is Low” (→P. 6-26)
ECM RX
The ECM (Error Correction Mode) detects and corrects
errors that occur during fax transmissions. It helps in
minimizing sending errors caused by a poor connection.
NOTE
Check if the ECM is enabled on the receiving fax
machine
The ECM is effective only when it is enabled on both machines.
An error occurs even when the ECM is enabled
The error may be caused by poor telephone line conditions.
When telephone line conditions are poor
It may take additional time to receive your fax if a problem occurs
when sending over the telephone line.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings>→ <RX Function
Settings> → <ECM RX>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off Disable the ECM.
On Enable the ECM.
Incoming Ring
Specify whether or not the external telephone or the
handset rings on an incoming call when <RX Mode> is set
to <Auto> or <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>.
You can set the incoming call ring time.
The machine automatically starts receiving a fax after the
external telephone keeps ringing for a specified length of
time.
The machine’s speaker rings on an incoming fax only when
<RX Mode> is set to <Fax/Tel Auto Switch>.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <RX Function
Settings> → <Incoming Ring>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off The telephone does not ring on an
incoming call.
On
Ring Times:
1 to 2 to 99
(times)
The telephone rings on an incoming call.
You can set the incoming call ring time in
rings in <Ring Times>.
Remote RX
Specify whether to receive faxes remotely by dialing the ID
number using the push-buttons of the external telephone
connected to the machine when an incoming call comes.
If you use the pulse line, press “*” (tone) and then dial the
Remote RX ID.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <RX Function
Settings> → <Remote RX>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off Disable remote retrieval.
On
Remote RX
ID: 00 to 25
to 99
Enable remote retrieval.
You can specify the ID number in <Remote
RX ID>.
Auto RX Switch
Set the incoming call ring time before the machine switches
to the fax mode automatically. This option can be enabled
when the <RX Mode> is set to <Manual>.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <RX Function
Settings> → <Auto RX Switch>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off The machine does not switch to the fax
mode automatically.
On
Incoming
Ring Time: 1
to 15 to 99
(seconds)
The machine switches to the fax mode
automatically after the specified length
of time.
2-Sided Printing
Enable this option to print on both sides of paper. This saves
excessive paper consumption.
IMPORTANT
Notes on 2-Sided printing
Accurately attach the paper size switch lever. If the paper size
switch lever is not securely attached, documents may not
be fed properly or jammed.
“1-sided Printing and 2-sided Printing” (→P. 4-4)
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <RX Print Settings>
→ <2-Sided Printing>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off Print on only one side of paper.
On Print on both sides of paper.
6-26
Using the Fax Functions
Reduce RX Size
Enable this option to scale the image to fit on the selected
paper size or reduce the image by a specific percentage
when you receive a fax.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> →<RX Print Settings> →
<Reduce RX Size>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off No image reduction.
On
Reduction Ratio:
Auto, 97%, 95%,
90%, 75%
<Auto>: Reduce the image
automatically to fit onto the selected
paper size.
<97%>, <95%>, <90%>, <75%>:
Reduce the image by the
predetermined ratio.
Reduction Method:
Vertical/Horizontal,
Vertical Only
<Vertical/Horizontal>: Reduce the
image in vertical and horizontal
directions.
<Vertical Only>: Reduce the image
in the vertical direction only.
RX Page Footer
Specify whether to print the reception date, time, job ID,
and page number at the bottom of the page when printing
received faxes.
How to access the option
[ ](Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <RX Print Settings> →
<RX Page Footer>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off Do not print the page footer.
On Print the page footer.
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low
Specify whether to continue printing received faxes when
the toner is nearly empty.
IMPORTANT
If <Continue Printing When Toner Is Low> is set to <On>
Note that the output may not be clear, as subtle details such as thin
lines and light colors may not be clearly reproduced, due to a small
amount of toner remaining inside the toner cartridge. Plus, faxes
are deleted once they have been printed.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <Fax Settings> → <RX Print Settings>
→ <Continue Printing When Toner Is Low>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off The machine does not continue printing received
faxes.
On The machine continues printing received faxes.
The steps to take for configuring the
system settings
Follow the steps in the procedure below to configure the
system settings.
The procedure describes the steps to change the “TX Start
Speed”setting.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <System Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Menu
USB Direct Print Se
...
Printer Settings
Adjustment/Maintena
...
System Settings
3 Select <Communication Management Settings>
using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
System Settings
Device Information
...
Dept. ID Management
...
Security Settings
Communication Manage
4 Select <Fax Settings> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Communication Mgt. Set
Fax Settings
Memory Lock Settings
5 Select <TX Start Speed> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Fax Settings
TX Start Speed
RX Start Speed
6 Select the send start speed using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
TX Start Speed
33600 bps
14400 bps
9600 bps
7200 bps
* Select <Apply> when <Apply> appears on the screen after you
have specified the setting and press [OK].
6-27
Using the Fax Functions
7 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
The procedure is complete.
Options
Configure the following options to receive a fax.
System Settings
Communication
Management
Settings
Fax Settings “TX Start Speed” (→P. 6-27)
“RX Start Speed” (→P. 6-27)
“Memory Lock Settings” (→P. 6-27)
“Select Country/Region” (→P. 6-27)
Restrict TX
Function
“Address Book PIN” (→P. 6-27)
“Restrict New Destinations” (→P. 6-28)
“Allow Fax Driver TX” (→P. 6-28)
“Restrict History TX” (→P. 6-28)
“Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry” (→P. 6-28)
“One-TouchCoded Dial TX Confirmation” (→P.
6-28)
“Restrict Sequential Broadcast” (→P. 6-28)
TX Start Speed
Change the transmission start speed if you are experiencing
a transmission problem.
How to access the option
[ ](Menu) → <System Settings> → <Communication
Management Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <TX Start
Speed>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps,
7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
RX Start Speed
Change the reception start speed if you are experiencing a
problem.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <System Settings> → <Communication
Management Settings> → <Fax Settings> → <RX Start
Speed>
Setting
(Bold: Default setting)
33600 bps, 14400 bps, 9600 bps,
7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
Memory Lock Settings
Normally, received documents are immediately printed. However,
you can specify whether or not to store received faxes in memory
before printing. You can then print the stored faxes at any time or
delete them without printing to save paper.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <System Settings> → <Communication
Management Settings> → <Memory Lock Settings> (*)
* If <Memory Lock PIN> is specified, use the numeric keys
[] to [ ] to enter those numbers, and then press [OK].
Settings
(Boldface: Default setting)
Off Disable Memory Lock.
On
Memory
Lock PIN:
Seven-digit
number
Once the PIN is set, you are prompted to
enter it every time you change or
disable the Memory Lock mode settings.
Print Report:
Off, On
Specify whether to print the RX result
report when receiving a fax.
Activate “Receive Results (D1370/D1350
Only)” to enable this setting.
Memory
Lock Time :
Off, On
When <On> is set, received faxes are
stored in memory only for a specified
length of time.
Set <Memory Lock Start Time> and
<Memory Lock End Time> respectively.
NOTE
Memory Lock PIN
• Press [OK] without entering any numbers when you do not want
to set the PIN.
• You cannot set a PIN consisting only of <0> (<0000000>).
• When you set a PIN starting with <0>, the PIN is set in the
following manner.
Example: When you enter <02> or <002>, the PIN is set as
<0000002>.
Memory Lock Settings operations
• When memory lock settings are changed from <On> to <Off>,
the documents saved in the memory up to then are combined
and printed.
“Combining and Printing the Received Documents You Saved”
(→P. 6-18)
• At <Memory Lock End Time>, you can combine and print
received documents saved in the memory from the <Memory
Lock Start Time> to the <Memory Lock End Time>.
Select Country/Region
Specify the country or region where the machine is used.
IMPORTANT
After you have configured the option
Restart the machine to take effect the changes.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <System Settings> → <Select Country/
Region>
Setting
(Bold: Default setting)
United States (US), Canada (CA),
Brazil (BR), Mexico (MX), Other
Address Book PIN
Set a PIN to protect the address book. You are prompted to
enter the correct PIN to register, edit, or delete destinations.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <System Settings> → <Restrict TX
Function> → <Address Book PIN>
How to set a PIN
Enter up to a 7-digit number.
To cancel the entered PIN, clear the numbers and press
[OK].
6-28
Using the Fax Functions
Restrict New Destinations
Enable this option to restrict registering new destinations
in one-touch keys or coded dial codes. When this option is
enabled, you are restricted to do the following.
• Specifying a destination using the numeric keys
• Registering new destinations in the address book, one-
touch keys, or coded dial codes
• Editing the destinations registered in the address book,
one-touch keys, or coded dial codes
IMPORTANT
Restriction exceptions
Entering new destinations from external telephone is not restricted.
When settings are not immediately applied
During fax sending operation including new destinations or
manual redialing operation, restriction settings may not be applied
immediately.
NOTE
Redial restrictions
When <Restrict New Dest.> is set to <On>, the saved fax sending
history up to then is deleted for preventing those new destinations
in the history from being redialed.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <System Settings> → <Restrict TX
Function> → <Restrict New Destinations>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off No restrictions.
On
You are restricted to register new destinations or
edit the destinations registered in one-touch keys or
coded dial codes.
Allow Fax Driver TX
Specify whether to allow sending faxes from the fax driver
installed on your computer.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <System Settings> → <Restrict TX
Function> → <Allow Fax Driver TX>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off Disallow sending faxes from the fax driver installed
on your computer.
On Allow sending faxes from the fax driver installed on
your computer.
Restrict History TX
Specify whether to restrict sending faxes from the history.
IMPORTANT
When settings are not immediately applied
During manual redialing operations, for example, restriction
settings may not be immediately applied.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <System Settings> → <Restrict TX
Function> → <Restrict History TX>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off Allow sending faxes from the history.
On Disallow sending faxes from the history.
Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry
Specify whether to require confirmation before sending a
fax. When this option is enabled, you are prompted to enter
the fax number again before sending a fax.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <System Settings> → <Restrict TX
Function> → <Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off Confirmation is not required.
On You are prompted to enter the fax number for
confirmation.
One-TouchCoded Dial TX Confirmation
Select whether or not to require confirmation when
specifying a destination by the one-touch key or coded
dialing code.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <System Settings> → <Restrict TX
Function> → <One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Confirmation>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off Confirmation is not required.
On You are required confirmation before specifying a
destination.
Restrict Sequential Broadcast
Specify whether to restrict sending faxes to multiple
destinations simultaneously.
How to access the option
[ ] (Menu) → <System Settings> → <Restrict TX
Function> → <Restrict Sequential Broadcast>
Settings
(Bold: Default setting)
Off Allow sending faxes to multiple destinations
simultaneously.
Confirm
Sequential
Broadcast
The confirmation screen is displayed when
you are sending faxes to multiple destinations
simultaneously.
Reject
Sequential
Broadcast
Disallow sending faxes to multiple
destinations simultaneously.
7-1
Chapter 7
Using the Scan Functions
The documents scanned by the machine can be stored in a computer or a USB memory
device. You can also send scanned documents to your e-mail application or a file server.
* If you are a Macintosh user, see the Canon Scanner Driver Guide.
To view how to display the Canon Scanner Driver Guide, see “For Macintosh Users” (→P. 11-4).
Basic Scan Operations 7-2
Scanning Using Keys on the Operation Panel 7-2
Saving Scanned Documents to USB Memory Device 7-4
E-mailing Scanned Documents (D1370 Only) 7-5
Sending Scanned Documents to a File Server (D1370 Only) 7-6
7-2
Using the Scan Functions
Scanning Using Keys on the Operation
Panel
You can scan a document using the keys on the operation
panel.
Note
To scan documents by operating
See “Scan” in the e-Manual.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
SCAN
1 Place your document.
“Loading Paper” (→P. 2-9)
“Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
2 Press [ ].
3 Select <Computer> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Select the scan type.
Computer
Remote Scanner
Memory Media
4 Specify a destination using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Specify destination.
EXAMPLE1
EXAMPLE2
• When multiple computers are connected the computer
connected by a USB cable is listed at the top.
• When a computer is connected by a USB cable this screen is not
displayed.
• If more than ten computers are connected via a network the
eleventh and subsequent computers are not displayed (you
cannot scan). Reduce the number of computers connected to
this machine via a network.
e-Manual→Scanning→Scanning Paper Documents
and Saving Them to a Computer (USB & Network
Connection)→Registering the Scanner in MF Network Scan
Utility
* You can change the names for the displayed computers.
e-Manual→Scanning→Scanning Paper Documents
and Saving Them to a Computer (USB & Network
Connection)→Using the MF Toolbox
5 Specify the scan settings using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Select Scan Type
Scan: Press OK
Color Scan
B&W Scan
Custom 1
Scanning operation starts.
The scanner settings are specified by default as follows.
Scan
Mode Resolution File
Type
PDF
Settings
Color Scan Color 300 dpi PDF Searchable/
Compact
B&W Scan Black and
White 300 dpi TIFF -
Custom 1 Color 300 dpi JPEG/
Exif -
Custom 2 Color 300 dpi PDF Searchable/
Standard
Scanning from the feeder
After saving the document, the display returns to the basic
scanning screen.
Scanning from the platen glass
Proceed to Step 6
Basic Scan Operations
7-3
Using the Scan Functions
If you cannot scan
You cannot scan when MF Toolbox setting screen is displayed.
Click [ ] to close the screen before starting a scan.
6 To continuously scan the document, select <Scan
Next Original> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Select Next Action
<Scan Next Original>
<Store and Finish>
<Cancel>
Confirm Destination
To Cancel the scan
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
(2) Select <Yes> with using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
To confirm the destination
Select <Confirm Destination> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
7 Select <Store and Finish> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Select Next Action
<Scan Next Original>
<Store and Finish>
<Cancel>
Confirm Destination
After saving the document, the display returns to the basic
scanning screen.
Note
The location of saved scanned images
After scanning, the folder where the images have been saved to
opens automatically.
By default, the folder for the date when you scanned the data is
created in the [Pictures] folder in [My Documents]. (For Windows XP,
the folder is created in the [My Pictures] folder.)
To change the scanner settings
From your computer you can change the settings for the save
location, file format, and image resolution.
e-Manual→Scanning→Scanning Paper Documents and Saving
Them to a Computer (USB & Network Connection)→Using the
MF Toolbox
7-4
Using the Scan Functions
Saving Scanned Documents to USB
Memory Device
You can save scanned documents to USB memory device
inserted in the USB port.
This section describes the basic procedure.
IMPORTANT
The USB memory device port on the machine
• The port supports USB 1.1.
• Do not insert anything other than USB memory device.
Supported file systems and memory capacity
Supported file systems and memory capacity include the following.
You can have your USB memory device formatted with one of the
following file systems on your computer.
• FAT16: up to 2 GB
• FAT32: up to 32GB
For details, see “Scanning” in the e-Manual.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK Start
SCAN
1 Insert a USB memory device to the USB port.
The machine will begin to read the device when USB memory is
inserted. Do not touch or remove the device from the port.
2 Place your document.
“Loading Paper” (→P. 2-9)
“Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
3 Press [ ].
4 Select <Memory Media> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Select the scan type.
Computer
Remote Scanner
Memory Media
5 Specify the scan settings based on your purpose
of the scan.
The following settings can be changed.
For details on the setting procedure, see “Scanning” in the e-Manual.
• Scan size
• Color Mode
• File Format
• Density
• Original orientation
• Original Type
• 2-Sided Original
• Sharpness
• Data Size
The settings specified here are effective only for the current task. To
apply these settings to all tasks, see “Scanning” in the e-Manual.
6 Press [ ] (Start).
Scan Next: Press Start
<Store and Finish>
<Cancel>
Scanning starts.
When scanning from the feeder, or set the
<File Format> to <JPEG>
After scanning the document, the scanned data is sent to
the USB memory.
When scanning from the platen glass, or set the
<File Format> to other than <JPEG>
Proceed to Step 7
7 To continuously scan the document, press [ ]
(Start).
Scan Next: Press Start
<Store and Finish>
<Cancel>
To Cancel the scan
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
8 Select <Store and Finish> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Scan Next: Press Start
<Store and Finish>
<Cancel>
The scanned data is sent to the USB memory.
7-5
Using the Scan Functions
Folder and file names that can be saved
Folder name
The “SCAN_00” folder is created in the
top level directory (root folder) in the USB
memory device. Scanned document files are
saved in this folder.
When the “SCAN_00” folder reaches limit, the
“SCAN_01” folder is automatically created.
Folders up to “SCAN_99” are automatically
created when the current working folder
becomes full.
File name
File names between “SCAN0001.XXX” and
“SCAN9999.XXX” are provided. (“XXX” is the
extension for the file format.)
The two-digit folder number is provided in
the fifth and sixth characters from the left.
A maximum of 100 files can be saved in a
folder.
NOTE
When removing the USB memory device form the port
(1) Press[ ] (Reset).
(2) Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel).
(3) Select <Device Status> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Status Monitor/Cancel
Device Status
Copy/Print Job
TX Job
RX Job
(4) Select <Remove Memory Media> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Device Status
Paper Information
Remove Memory Media
Check Counter
Secure Print Memory
...
(5) Remove the USB memory device.
(6) Press [ ] (Status Monitor/Cancel) after you have checked the
details of the selected job to close the screen.
E-mailing Scanned Documents (D1370 Only)
Attach scanned documents to e-mails and send them to a
specified destination.
This section describes the basic procedure.
Note
Preparing to Use the E-mail Functions
You can send scanned documents to your e-mail application. You
can convert scanned documents into PDF files and send them to
the destination (e-mail application) as e-mail attachments.
Please read “Network Settings” in the e-Manual and configure your
e-mail settings before using the e-mail function.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK Start
SCAN
1 Place your document.
“Loading Paper” (→P. 2-9)
“Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
2 Press [ ].
3 Select <E-Mail> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
Select the scan type.
Remote Scanner
Memory Media
E-Mail
4 Specify the destination.
Specify destinations in the following ways.
For details on the setting procedure, see “Scanning” in the e-Manual.
• input directly
• by selecting a one-touch key
• by selecting a coded dial code
• from the Address book
• under sequential broadcasting
5 Specify the scan settings based on your purpose
of the scan.
The following settings can be changed.
For details on the setting procedure, see “Scanning” in the e-Manual.
• Scan size
• Color Mode
• File Format
• Density
• Original orientation
• Original Type
• 2-Sided Original
• Sharpness
• Data Size
The settings specified here are effective only for the current task.
To make the settings effective for all e-mail send operations, see
“Scanning” in the e-Manual.
7-6
Using the Scan Functions
6 Specify the e-mail settings as needed.
The following settings can be changed.
For details on the setting procedure, see “Scanning” in the e-Manual.
• Subject/Body
• Reply-to
• Priority
The settings specified here are effective only for the current task.
To make the settings effective for all e-mail send operations, see
“Scanning” in the e-Manual.
7 Press [ ] (Start).
Scanning starts.
8 To continuously scan the document, press [ ]
(Start).
Scan Next: Press Start
<Start Sending>
<Cancel>
Destinations: 1
No. of TX Pages: 1
To Cancel the scan
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
To confirm the destination
Select <Destinations: > using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
To confirm the number of transferred pages
Select <No. of TX Pages> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
9 Select <Start Sending> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Scan Next: Press Start
<Start Sending>
<Cancel>
Destinations: 1
No. of TX Pages: 1
The E-mail is sent.
Sending Scanned Documents to a File
Server (D1370 Only)
Sending scanned documents to a file server.
This section describes the basic procedure.
Note
Preparation for Scanning (File Server)
You can send scanned documents to a file server. You can convert
scanned documents into TIFF files and send them a file server.
Before sending to a file server, see “Network Settings” in the
e-Manual and configure the send settings.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK Start
SCAN
1 Place your document.
“Loading Paper” (→P. 2-9)
“Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
2 Press [ ].
3 Select <Windows (SMB)> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Select the scan type.
Memory Media
E-Mail
Windows (SMB)
4 Specify the destination.
Specify destinations in the following ways.
For details on the setting procedure, see “Scanning” in the e-Manual.
• by selecting a one-touch key
• by selecting a coded dial code
• from the Address book
5 Specify the scan settings based on your purpose
of the scan.
The following settings can be changed.
For details on the setting procedure, see “Scanning” in the e-Manual.
• Scan size
• Color Mode
• File Format
• Density
• Original orientation
• Original Type
• 2-Sided Original
• Sharpness
• Data Size
The settings specified here are effective only for the current task. To
make the settings effective for all send operations, see “Scanning” in
the e-Manual.
7-7
Using the Scan Functions
6 Press [ ] (Start).
Scanning starts.
When scanning from the feeder, or set the
<File Format> to <JPEG>
After scanning the document, the scanned data is sent to
the USB memory.
When scanning from the platen glass, or set the
<File Format> to other than <JPEG>
Proceed to Step 7.
7 To continuously scan the document, press [ ]
(Start).
Scan Next: Press Start
<Start Sending>
<Cancel>
Destinations: 1
No. of TX Pages: 1
To Cancel the scan
(1) Select <Cancel> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
(2) Select <Yes> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
To confirm the destination
Select <Destinations: > using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
To confirm the number of transferred pages
Select <No. of TX Pages> using [ ] or [ ] and press [OK].
8 Select <Start Sending> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Scan Next: Press Start
<Start Sending>
<Cancel>
Destinations: 1
No. of TX Pages: 1
The scanned file is sent.
7-8
Using the Scan Functions
8-1
Chapter 8
Maintenance
This chapter describes the maintenance of this machine, replacement of the toner cartridges, and so on.
Cleaning the Machine 8-2
Cleaning the Exterior 8-2
Cleaning the Fixing Unit 8-2
Cleaning the Platen Glass 8-3
Cleaning the Feeder 8-3
Cleaning the Feeder Automatically 8-3
Precautions When Cleaning the Machine 8-4
Replacing Toner Cartridges 8-5
When a Message Appears (D1370/D1350 Only) 8-5
When White Streaks Appear on the Output or
the Output Is Partially Faded 8-5
Supplied Toner Cartridge 8-6
About Replacement Toner Cartridge 8-6
Handling Toner Cartridge 8-6
Storing Toner Cartridges 8-7
Using the Toner Saver Mode 8-7
Purchasing Consumables 8-7
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge 8-8
Replacing the Toner Cartridge 8-8
Precautions When Replacing Toner Cartridge 8-9
Recycling Used Cartridges 8-11
The Clean Earth Campaign 8-11
U.S.A. PROGRAM 8-11
Packaging 8-11
Shipping 8-12
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME 8-13
Relocating the Machine 8-14
Precautions When Relocating the Machine 8-15
8-2
Maintenance
Cleaning the Exterior
Clean the exterior of the machine and ventilation slots.
1 Turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the
power cord.
2 Clean the exterior of the machine with a soft, well
wrung out cloth dampened with water or mild
detergent diluted with water.
3 Wait for the machine to dry completely before
reconnecting the power cord, and then turn ON
the power.
Cleaning the Fixing Unit
The fixing unit may be dirty under the following conditions. In
such case, clean the fixing unit.
• When black streaks appear on the output
• When the toner cartridge is replaced
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> using [ ] or
[ ] and press [OK].
Menu
Scan Settings
USB Direct Print Se
...
Printer Settings
Adjustment/Maintenan
3 Select <Clean Fixing Unit> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Adjustment/Maintenance
Toner Saver Mode
Black Text Processi
...
Special Processing
Clean Fixing Unit
4 Check if the supported paper is set in the paper
drawer and press [OK].
Supported Paper:
Size: A4, LTR
Type: Plain, Plain L
OK
5 Check the procedure shown in the display and
press [OK].
* The cleaning paper will be printed.
Steps (Stare:Press OK)
1. Print Clean. Sheet
2. Start Cleaning
6 Load the cleaning paper to the multi-purpose tray
with the black band side up.
7 Check the screen and press [OK].
The cleaning begins. It takes approximately 80 seconds to
complete the process.
Place the cleaning
sheet with the print
face up in the mulch-
purpose tray, and
press OK.
* We recommend that plain paper be loaded when cleaning the
fixing unit.
When the cleaning does not start
You cannot use this function when jobs are stored in memory.
8 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
Cleaning the Machine
8-3
Maintenance
Cleaning the Platen Glass
Follow this procedure to clean the platen glass and under
surface of the feeder.
1 Turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the
power cord.
2 Open the feeder.
3 Clean the platen glass and the under surface of
the feeder.
(1) Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water.
(2) Wipe the areas with a soft, dry cloth.
4 Close the feeder.
5 Connect the power cord and turn ON the power
switch.
Cleaning the Feeder
If your document has black streaks or appear dirty after it has
been scanned from the feeder, the roller inside the feeder may
be dirty. Clean the feeder scanning area and rollers.
1 Turn OFF the power switch and disconnect the
power cord.
2 Open the feeder cover.
3 Clean the rollers (A) inside the feeder with a well
wrung out cloth dampened with water and wipe
them with a soft, dry cloth.
(A)
4 Close the feeder cover.
5 Connect the power cord and turn ON the power
switch.
Cleaning the Feeder Automatically
If your document has black streaks or appears dirty after it has
been scanned from the feeder, the rollers inside the feeder
may be dirty. Clean the roller using blank paper.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> using [ ] or
[ ] and press [OK].
Menu
Scan Settings
USB Direct Print Se
...
Printer Settings
Adjustment/Maintenan
8-4
Maintenance
3 Select <Clean Feeder> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Adjustment/Maintenance
Black Text Processi
...
Special Processing
Clean Fixing Unit
Clean Feeder
4 Load 10 sheets of A4 or Letter size plain paper in
the feeder, and then press [OK].
The cleaning begins. It takes approximately 44 seconds to
complete the process.
Clean Feeder
Load 10 sheets of A4
or LTR in feeder.
Start
5 Press [ ] (Menu) to close the menu screen.
Precautions When Cleaning the Machine
Before cleaning the machine, note the following.
• Make sure that no jobs are stored in memory before
turning OFF the power switch and disconnecting the
power cord.
• Use a soft cloth to avoid scratching the components.
• Do not clean the machine components with tissue paper,
paper towels, or similar materials. These materials tend to
stick to the components or generate static charges.
NOTE
About sending or receiving faxes
When the power plug is unplugged, the machine cannot send or
receive faxes.
When a job is waiting to be printed
The job is deleted when you turn OFF the power switch.
About jobs stored in memory
Jobs can be stored in memory for approximately an hour after the
power plug has been unplugged. To view jobs stored in memory,
see the following.
“Managing Faxes Stored in Memory” (→P. 6-18)
CAUTION
Precautions to take when cleaning the feeder
Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may tear the
document or damage the machine.
Precautions to take when closing the feeder
Be careful not to get your fingers caught.
Precautions to take when you get toner onto your
hands or into clothing
If toner comes in contact with your hands or clothing, wash
them immediately in cold water. Do not use warm water, as
it will set the toner and make it difficult to remove the toner
stains.
8-5
Maintenance
Toner cartridges are consumables. When the toner becomes
nearly empty or has run out completely in the middle of a
job run, a message appears on the screen, or the following
problems may occur. Take the appropriate action accordingly.
●A message appears on the screen
“When a Message Appears (D1370/D1350 Only)”
(→P. 8-5)
●White streaks appear on the output, or the output is
partially faded.
“When White Streaks Appear on the Output or the
Output Is Partially Faded” (→P. 8-5)
IMPORTANT
About toner cartridges
For more information on toner cartridges, see the following
sections.
“Supplied Toner Cartridge” (→P. 8-6)
“About Replacement Toner Cartridge” (→P. 8-6)
“Handling Toner Cartridge” (→P. 8-6)
“Storing Toner Cartridges” (→P. 8-7)
“Using the Toner Saver Mode” (→P. 8-7)
“Purchasing Consumables” (→P. 8-7)
* The average yield of replacement toner cartridges varies from
that of the supplied toner cartridge.
When a Message Appears (D1370/D1350 Only)
When the toner becomes nearly empty in the middle of a job
run, a message appears on the screen.
Message
When the
message is
displayed
on the
screen
Descriptions and Solutions
<Prepare
toner
cartridge.>
When
the toner
cartridge
needs a
replacement
soon.
Shake the toner cartridge to evenly
distribute the toner inside the cartridge.
“Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge”
(→P. 8-8)
We recommend that the toner cartridge be
replaced before printing high-volume
documents.
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge” (→P. 8-8)
IMPORTANT
When white streaks appear on the output, or the output
is partially faded
When white streaks appear on the output or the output is partially
faded, the toner cartridge has almost reached the end of its life,
even if no message appears on the screen. When the print quality
becomes unacceptable, see the following to fix the problem.
“When White Streaks Appear on the Output or the Output Is
Partially Faded” (→P. 8-5)
When White Streaks Appear on the
Output or the Output Is Partially Faded
When the toner nearly runs out, white streaks appear on the
output, or the output is partially faded.
* No message appears on the screen, if the toner nearly runs out.
Replace the toner cartridge when white streaks appear on the
output, or the output is partially faded.
* Do not perform <Copy Image Adjustment> in such situations
above. Even you try to adjust using this function, the condition
may not be improved.
When this problem occurs
Follow the steps in the procedure below before replacing
the toner cartridge. The machine continues printing until
the toner runs out completely.
“Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge” (→P. 8-8)
When the print quality is still unacceptable
If the problem persists after you have followed the steps in
the procedure below, replace the toner cartridge.
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge” (→P. 8-8)
Replacing Toner Cartridges
8-6
Maintenance
Supplied Toner Cartridge
The average yield of the toner cartridge that comes with the
machine is as follows.
Canon Cartridge
120 Starter Average yield*1 : 2,300 sheets
*1 The average yield is on the basis of “ISO/IEC 19752”*2 when printing
A4 size paper with the default print density setting.
*2 “ISO/IEC 19752” is the global standard related to “Method for
the determination of toner cartridge yield for monochromatic
electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that
contain printer components” issued by ISO (International
Organization for Standardization).
The average yield of the replacement toner cartridge varies
from that of the supplied toner cartridge.
About Replacement Toner Cartridge
Purchase replacement toner cartridges from your local
authorized Canon dealer.
Use the table below as a guide for replacing the toner
cartridge. Note that you may need to replace the toner
cartridge earlier than the suggested replacement interval,
depending on where the machine is installed, what kinds of
paper used for printing, and what types of documents that you
are printing.
Canon genuine
toner cartridge Replacement Intervals
Canon Cartridge 120 Average yield*1: 5,000 sheets
*1 The average yield is on the basis of “ISO/IEC 19752”*2 when printing
A4 size paper with the default print density setting.
*2 “ISO/IEC 19752” is the global standard related to “Method for
the determination of toner cartridge yield for monochromatic
electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that
contain printer components” issued by ISO (International
Organization for Standardization).
IMPORTANT
About replacement toner cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is
recommended.
Model name Supported Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge
D1370/D1350/
D1320 Canon Cartridge 120
Handling Toner Cartridge
Note the following when handling the toner cartridge.
IMPORTANT
Handling toner cartridges
• Keep the toner cartridge away from computer screens, disk
drives, and floppy disks. They may be damaged by magnet
which is in inside of the toner cartridge.
• Avoid locations subject to high temperature, high humidity, or
rapid changes in temperature.
• Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or bright
light for more than five minutes.
• Store the toner cartridge in its protective bag. Do not open
the bag until you are ready to install the toner cartridge in the
machine.
• Keep the protective bag for the toner cartridge. They are
required when transporting the machine.
• Do not store the toner cartridge in a salty atmosphere or where
there are corrosive gases such as from aerosol sprays.
• Do not remove the toner cartridge from the machine
unnecessarily.
• Print quality may deteriorate if the drum surface is exposed to
light or is damaged.
• Always hold the toner cartridge by its handle to avoid touching
the drum.
• Do not place the toner cartridge in an upright or an upside
down position. If the toner is kept upright or upside down, the
toner will solidify and may not return to its original condition
even if it is shaken.
• When disposing of a used toner cartridge, place the toner
container into its protective bag to prevent the toner from
scattering, and then dispose of the toner cartridge according to
local regulations.
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges.
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges
in the marketplace.
Use of counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or
machine performance.
Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage
caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see http://www.canon.com/counterfeit.
CAUTION
If toner leaks from the toner cartridge
Be careful not to inhale the toner or allow it to come into
direct contact with your skin. If the toner comes into contact
with your skin, wash with soap. If the skin becomes irritated
or you inhale the toner, consult a physician immediately.
When removing a toner cartridge
Make sure to remove it carefully. If not removed with care,
the toner powder may scatter and come in contact with
your eyes and mouth. If toner gets into your eyes or mouth,
wash them immediately with cold water and consult a
physician.
Keep the toner cartridge away from small children.
If the toner or other parts are ingested, consult a physician
immediately.
Do not disassemble the toner cartridge.
The toner may scatter and get into your eyes or mouth. If
toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately
with cold water and consult a physician.
WARNING
Do not place the toner cartridge in fire.
This may cause toner remaining inside the cartridge to ignite
and result in burns.
When cleaning up spilled or scattered toner
If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the
toner particles together or wipe them up with a soft, damp
cloth in a way that prevents inhalation.
Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have safeguards
against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing so
may cause a malfunction in the vacuum cleaner, or result in
a dust explosion due to static discharge.
8-7
Maintenance
Storing Toner Cartridges
Be aware of the following points when storing a new toner
cartridge or handling the toner cartridge that was taken out
of the machine for maintenance or relocating the machine
somewhere.
IMPORTANT
Precautions when storing toner cartridges
To use toner cartridges in a safe and trouble-free manner, store
them in a place that fulfills the following conditions.
• Do not store toner cartridges in a location exposed to direct
sunlight.
• Do not store toner cartridges in a location subject to high
temperature or humidity or in a location with dramatic changes
in temperature or humidity.
- Storage temperature range: 32 to 95°F (0 to 35°C)
- Storage humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (no condensation)
• Do not store toner cartridges in a place where corrosive gases,
such as ammonia, are generated, or where a considerable
amount of salt is contained in the air, or where there is a lot of
dust.
• Keep toner cartridges out of the reach of small children.
• Keep toner cartridges away from products that may be damaged
by magnetism, such as a floppy disk or disk drive.
Store toner cartridges in the same orientation as when
they are installed in the machine.
Do not store toner cartridges vertically or upside-down.
When removing the toner cartridge which is being used
from the machine
Immediately place the removed toner cartridge into the original
protective bag or wrap it with a thick cloth.
About a new toner cartridge
Do not take a new toner cartridge out of the protective bag until it
is ready to be used.
NOTE
About condensation
Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets may
develop both inside and outside toner cartridges. The formation of
water droplets is called condensation.
Condensation will adversely affect the quality of toner cartridges.
Using the Toner Saver Mode
You can specify whether to conserve the amount of toner used
for copying and faxing.
NOTE
To conserve the amount of toner used for printing
Enable [Toner Save] on the [Quality] tab of the printer driver.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Menu
1 Press [ ] (Menu).
2 Select <Adjustment/Maintenance> using [ ] or
[ ] and press [OK].
Menu
Scan Settings
USB Direct Print Se
...
Printer Settings
Adjustment/Maintenan
3 Select <Toner Saver Mode> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Adjustment/Maintenance
Copy Image Adjustme
...
Printer Density
Toner Saver Mode
Black Text Processi
...
4 Select <Off> or <On> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Toner Saver Mode
Off
On
<Off> Disable the toner saver mode.
<On> Enable the toner saver mode.
NOTE
When the <Toner Saver Mode> is set to <On>
The amount of toner used can be conserved. Note that the output
may not be clear, as subtle details such as thin lines and light colors
may not be clearly reproduced.
5 Press [ ] (Menu) to return to the standby mode.
Purchasing Consumables
To purchase replacement toner cartridges, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer.
To find a dealer near, contact the Canon help line.
8-8
Maintenance
Before Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Before replacing toner cartridges, see “Precautions When
Replacing Toner Cartridge” (→P. 8-9)
When the toner nearly runs out, follow the steps in the
procedure below before replacing the toner cartridge.
The machine continues printing until the toner runs out
completely.
1 Open the front cover while holding down the
open button.
2 Remove the toner cartridge.
3 Gently shake the toner cartridge five or six times
to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge.
4 Insert the toner cartridge.
Fit (A) on both sides of the toner cartridge into the guides located
on both sides of the machine and slide the toner cartridge into the
machine until the toner cartridge comes to rest and is held against
the back of the machine.
(A)
(A)
5 Close the front cover.
If you cannot close the front cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed correctly. Do not
try to forcefully close the toner cover, as this may damage the
machine.
If there are white lines in the print result or it is blurred or
distorted even though the above operations have been
performed, replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
“Replacing the Toner Cartridge” (→P. 8-8)
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
Before replacing toner cartridges, see “Precautions When
Replacing Toner Cartridge” (→P. 8-9)
1 Open the front cover while holding down the
open button.
8-9
Maintenance
2 Remove the toner cartridge.
3 Take out the new toner cartridge from the
protective bag.
You can open the protective bag with your hands from the notch.
* Keep the protective bag. You will need them when you remove
the toner cartridge for printer maintenance or other purposes.
4 Gently shake the toner cartridge five or six times
to evenly distribute the toner inside the cartridge.
5 Place the toner cartridge on a flat surface.
6 Fold the tab, and the pull out the sealing tapes
(approximately 20” (50 cm)).
IMPORTANT
Precautions when pulling out the sealing tape
• Do not pull the sealing tape at an angle or up and down. If the
tape breaks, it may not be pulled out completely.
Front View
• If the sealing tape is still hanging outside the toner cartridge, pull
it out completely. If the tape remains inside the toner cartridge,
it may cause poor print quality. If you are using the Fax, please
note that you can only print the received data once, because the
received data is deleted once it is printed.
• Dispose of the sealing tape according to local regulations.
7 Insert the toner cartridge.
Fit (A) on both sides of the toner cartridge into the guides located
on both sides of the machine and slide the toner cartridge into the
machine until the toner cartridge comes to rest and is held against
the back of the machine.
(A)
(A)
8 Close the front cover.
If you cannot close the front cover
Make sure that the toner cartridge is installed correctly. Do not
try to forcefully close the toner cover, as this may damage the
machine.
Precautions When Replacing Toner Cartridge
See “Maintenance and Inspections” (→P. xvi) in “Important
Safety Instructions” as well.
WARNING
Do not dispose of a used toner cartridge in an open
flame.
This may ignite the toner remaining inside the cartridge,
resulting in burns or fire.
When cleaning up spilled or scattered toner
If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather
the toner particles together or wipe them up with a soft,
damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation.
Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have
safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled
toner. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the vacuum
cleaner, or result in a dust explosion due to static
discharge.
CAUTION
Precautions to take when you get toner onto your
hands or into clothing
If toner comes in contact with your hands or clothing,
wash them immediately in cold water. Do not use warm
water, as it will set the toner and make it difficult to
remove the toner stains.
Do not allow the toner to scatter.
Do not pull out the sealing tape forcefully or stop pulling
the tape halfway, as this may cause toner to spill out. If you
are using the Fax, please note that you can only print the
received data once, because the received data is deleted
once it is printed.
If toner gets into your eyes or mouth, flush them
immediately with cold water and consult a physician.
8-10
Maintenance
IMPORTANT
About replacement toner cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is
recommended.
Model Name Supported Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge
D1370/D1350/
D1320 Canon Cartridge 120
Be Careful of Counterfeit Toner Cartridges.
Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges
in the marketplace.
Use of counterfeit toner cartridges may result in poor print quality
or machine performance.
Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage
caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridges.
For more information, see the following Web site.
http://www.canon.com/counterfeit
Shake the toner cartridge before replacement.
If the toner is not distributed evenly inside the cartridge, this may
cause poor print quality.
Hold the toner cartridges properly.
When handling the toner cartridge, hold it properly, as shown in
the illustration below. Do not stand it vertically or hold it upside
down.
Do not touch the electrical contacts (A) or the toner
cartridge memory (B), and do not open the drum
protective cover (C).
Touching the electrical contacts (A) or the toner cartridge memory
(B) may result in damage to the machine.
Print quality may deteriorate if you touch or damage the
photoconductor drum. Never touch it or open the drum protective
cover (C).
(A)
Bottom View
(C)
(B)
Do not touch the high-voltage contacts (D) or the
electrical contacts (E).
This may result in damage to the cartridge.
(D)
(E)
Miscellaneous precautions
• Do not expose the toner cartridge to direct sunlight or strong
light.
• Never disassemble or modify it.
• Condensation may form in and on the toner cartridge if it is
brought into an environment that exposes it to sudden changes
in temperature and/or humidity.
If you move the toner cartridge to a location that is warmer or
has higher humidity, leave the cartridge in the new location for
2 hours or longer without opening the protective bag to allow it
to adjust to the new temperature.
• Do not leave the front cover open for a long time with the toner
cartridges installed.
• Keep the toner cartridge away from equipment that generates
magnetic fields, such as LCD displays and computers.
• A toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Keep the toner cartridge
away from products that may be damaged by magnetism, such
as a floppy disk or disk drive. This may lead to damage to data.
NOTE
About the packing materials
The packing materials are subject to change in form or placement,
or may be added or removed without notice.
When <Continue Printing When Toner Is Low> is set to
<On>
The machine continues printing the received fax if the toner
cartridge is not replaced. Note that the output may not be clear, as
subtle details such as thin lines and light colors may not be clearly
reproduced, due to a small amount of toner remaining inside the
toner cartridge. Plus, the data is deleted once it has been printed.
“Continue Printing When Toner Is Low” (→P. 6-26)
8-11
Maintenance
Canon has instituted a worldwide recycling program for cartridges called “The Clean Earth Campaign”.
This program preserves precious natural resources by utilizing a variety of materials found in the used
cartridges
that are of no further use, to remanufacture new cartridges which, at the same time, keeps the
environment cleaner by reducing landfill waste.
Complete details concerning this program are enclosed in each Cartridge box.
The Clean Earth Campaign
●THE Canon CARTRIDGE RECYCLING PROGRAM
The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program fulfills the first initiative of Canon’s Clean Earth Campaign, which
supports four critical environmental areas:
• Recycling in the Workplace
• Conserving Environmental Resources
• Scientific Research and Education
• Encouraging Outdoors Appreciation
The remaining “Clean Earth” initiatives are supported in the U.S. through sponsorships of the National Park Foundation, the National
Wildlife Federation, and The Nature Conservancy and in Canada through donations to the World Wildlife Fund Canada and The
Nature Conservancy of Canada.
Since its inception, The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program has collected huge amount of cartridges that otherwise would have
been discarded into landfills or similar facilities.
Instead, this rapidly growing program returns used cartridges to the manufacturing process, thus conserving an array of resources.
Becoming a part of this worthwhile program is easy. When your cartridge is of no further use, simply follow the instructions
detailed for U.S. or Canadian residents.
We appreciate your support of The Canon Cartridge Recycling Program.
Working together we can make a significant contribution to a cleaner planet.
• Cartridges collected through this program are not refilled.
• You are not entitled to a tax deduction or rebate for the return of empty cartridges.
• This program may be modified or discontinued without notice.
U.S.A. PROGRAM
Packaging
●Option A-1: Single Box Return
• Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge’s box.
• Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.
Recycling Used Cartridges
8-12
Maintenance
●Option B: Volume Box Return
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.
• Place as many cartridges as possible into one box.
Carefully seal the box with tape;
or
• Call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive your free eight cartridge collection box.
●Option A-2: Multiple Box Return
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.
• Complete Option A-1.
• Bundle multiple cartridge boxes together securely with tape.
Please be sure that the shipment does not exceed UPS specifications.
Maximum weight = 70 lb. (31.8 kg)
Maximum length = 108” (2,743 mm)
Maximum girth (length + 2 x width + 2 x height) = 130” (3,302 mm)
If your shipment exceeds the above limits, please call 1-800-OK-Canon for special shipping information.
Please Note:
Do not send defective cartridges for replacement.
Defective cartridges under warranty should be exchanged by an authorized dealer or service facility as provided in the
warranty.
Shipping
Apply the UPS authorized returning label provided in this guide.
Residents of Alaska and Hawaii: Do not use the UPS authorized returning label. For Alaska and Hawaii Canon set up alternative
mail service with the U.S. Postal Service.
Please call 1-800-OK-Canon to receive U.S. Postal Service merchandise returning label.
• Give the shipment to your UPS driver when you receive your next regular delivery; (UPS may charge a fee for customers who
call UPS to pick up a cartridge shipment if they do not already have a delivery scheduled.)
or
• Take the shipment to your local UPS receiving point.
8-13
Maintenance
CANADA PROGRAM-CANADA PROGRAMME
●Option A: Single Box Return
• Repackage the empty cartridge utilizing the wrapper and pulp mould end-blocks from the new cartridge’s box.
• Place the empty cartridge in the box of your new cartridge. Seal the box.
• Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure. Canon’s labels are specially marked so that Canon
pays the postage.
• Deposit your empty cartridge in any full size street mailbox or take it to your local Canada Post outlet or franchise.
●Option B: Volume Box Return (eight or more cartridges)
We encourage you to use this option as a more efficient way to ship cartridges.
• Call 1-800-667-2666 to receive your free Canon collection box kit.
• The collection box can accommodate eight individual cartridge boxes.
• Place your eight individually packaged boxes of empty cartridges into the Canon collection box. Seal the box.
• Apply the Canon Canada Inc./Canada Post label provided in this brochure.
• Canon’s labels are specially marked so that Canon pays the postage.
• Deliver to any local Canada Post outlet or franchise. Customers who hold a Commercial pick-up agreement with Canada Post
may have their collection box picked up.
Working to preserve endangered species is a long-standing Canon interest.
To this end, for every cartridge collected, Canon Canada donates $1, shared equally between World Wildlife Fund Canada and the
Nature Conservancy of Canada. This donation is utilized in Canada.
• For further information about The Clean Earth Campaign in Canada, please call or write to Canon.
1-800-667-2666
Canon Canada Inc.
Corporate Customer Relations
6390 Dixie Road
Mississauga, ON L5T 1P7
8-14
Maintenance
Before transporting the machine, see “Precautions When
Relocating the Machine” (→P. 8-15)
Follow the steps in the procedure below to relocate the
machine somewhere else for maintenance and other purposes.
1 Turn the power OFF, then disconnect the cables
and cord from the machine.
(2)
(7)
(3)
(4)
(6)
OFF
(2)
(5)
OFF
ON
(1)
<How to remove the cables and cord>
USB cable* (2) Turn the computer off.
(3) Remove it from the machine.
LAN cable* (4) Remove it from the machine.
Power cord
(5) Unplug the power plug from the
AC power outlet.
(6) Remove it from the machine.
Telephone cables* (7) Remove it from the machine.
* Whether the cable is connected or not varies depending on
your environment.
2 If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
3 Pull out the paper drawer.
4 Carry the machine to the new installation site.
After making sure that the cover and tray are closed, hold the
handle on the front to lift and transport the machine. Check the
weight of the machine so it can be carried safely.
When the optional paper feeder is installed
Remove the paper feeder from the machine, install it in the new
installation site, then transport the machine.
* Do not carry the machine with the paper feeder installed. If you
do so, the paper feeder may drop, resulting in personal injury.
5 Put the machine down carefully at the new
installation site.
NOTE
Installation procedures
See the Starter Guide that comes with the machine.
Relocating the Machine
When transporting the machine long distance
To prevent damage to the machine during transport,
perform the following.
• Remove the toner cartridges
* “Storing Toner Cartridges” (→P. 8-7)
• Securely pack the printer in the original box with
packing materials
* If the original box and packing materials are not available,
find an appropriate box along with packing materials and
pack the machine and the parts appropriately.
8-15
Maintenance
Precautions When Relocating the Machine
IMPORTANT
Do not carry the machine with the covers or trays open.
Make sure that the scanning platform and paper drawer are closed
before lifting, carrying, and relocating the machine.
CAUTION
Set the machine down slowly and carefully.
Be careful not to hurt your hands or fingers.
WARNING
When relocating the machine
Be sure to turn off the power switches of the machine and
your computer, and unplug the power plug and interface
cables.
Failure to do so can damage the cables or cords, resulting
in a fire or electrical shock.
8-16
Maintenance
9-1
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting
This chapter describes solutions for cases such as paper jam and when problems are not
solved.
Clearing Jams 9-2
Document Jams in the Feeder 9-2
Paper Jams in the Output Area 9-4
Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray 9-4
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer (Drawer 1 or 2) 9-4
Paper Jams in the Back Cover and Duplex Unit 9-5
Paper Jams in the Front Cover 9-5
Paper Jams in the 2-sided Transport Guide 9-6
Onscreen Message 9-8
Error Codes 9-9
When <Incorrect Size/Setting> Appears 9-12
Troubleshooting 9-13
Check the Following First 9-13
Is the power switched ON? 9-13
Has the power switch been just turned ON? 9-13
Is the machine in the sleep mode? 9-13
Are the settings properly configured? 9-13
Is the Error indicator on or blinking? 9-13
Does a message appear on the screen? 9-14
Is the telephone line connected or configured properly?
(D1370/D1350 Only) 9-14
If You Cannot Solve a Problem 9-14
When a Power Failure Occurs 9-15
Printing Results Are Not Good 9-16
Paper Curls 9-16
Paper Creases 9-17
Vertical Streaks Appear on the Output 9-18
Toner Smudges and Spatters Appear around Text and Images 9-19
The Bottom Edge of Paper or Following Paper Has Smudge Marks
9-19
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed 9-20
When a Problem Cannot Be Resolved 9-21
Customer Support (U.S.A.) 9-21
Customer Support (Canada) 9-21
9-2
Troubleshooting
See “Maintenance and Inspections” (→P. xvi) in “Important
Safety Instructions” as well.
Keys to be used for this operation
When <Paper jam.> appears on the screen, a paper jam has
occurred in the feeder or somewhere inside the machine. To
remove the jammed document or paper, follow the onscreen
instructions.
“Document Jams in the Feeder” (→P. 9-2)
“Paper Jams in the Output Area” (→P. 9-4)
“Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray” (→P. 9-4)
“Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer (Drawer 1 or 2)” (→P. 9-4)
“Paper Jams in the Back Cover and Duplex Unit” (→P. 9-5)
“Paper Jams in the Front Cover” (→P. 9-5)
“Paper Jams in the 2-sided Transport Guide” (→P. 9-6)
IMPORTANT
Perform the operation while the machine is still ON
If it is turned OFF, the data that is printing will be erased.
If the jammed paper is torn
Remove all torn pieces of paper to avoid further jams.
If paper jams occur repeatedly
Check the followings.
• Fan the paper stack and tap the edge on a flat surface to align
the paper before loading it into the machine.
• Make sure that the paper you are using meets the requirements
for use.
e-Manual → Specifications → Paper → Supported Paper
Types
• Make sure that you have removed all scraps of paper from the
inside of the machine.
Do not touch the high-voltage contacts (A) or the
electrical contacts (B)
This may result in damage to the machine.
(A)
(B)
Do not touch the transfer roller (C)
This may result in deterioration of print quality.
(C)
Do not touch the feeder roller (D)
This may result in malfunctions or damage to the machine.
(D)
NOTE
Do not force the jammed document or paper out of the
machine.
Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line
for assistance, if needed.
Document Jams in the Feeder
Follow onscreen instructions as well as the ones provided in
this section to remove jammed documents.
1 Press [ ].
Paper jam.
Press [ ] to
display steps.
2 Remove the document loaded in the feeder.
3 Open the feeder cover.
Clearing Jams
9-3
Troubleshooting
4 Move the release lever (A) to the position shown
in the figure.
(A)
5 Remove the jammed document by pulling it
gently.
6 Open the inner cover.
7 Remove the jammed document by pulling it
gently.
8 Lift the document feeder tray and remove the
document by pulling it gently.
9 Put the document feeder tray back into place.
10
Close inner cover.
11
Close the feeder cover.
12
Open the feeder or the platen glass cover and
remove the document by pulling it gently.
13
Close the feeder or the platen glass cover gently.
14
Place document in the feeder.
9-4
Troubleshooting
Paper Jams in the Output Area
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps
below to remove jammed paper.
1 Press [ ].
Paper jam.
Press [ ] to
display steps.
(End: Press OK)
2 Lift the scanning platform.
3 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out
gently.
4 Lower the scanning platform.
5 When the following screen appears, select <Yes>
using [ ] and press [OK].
The machine is ready to print.
Is all of the jammed
paper removed?
Yes No
Paper Jams in the Multi-Purpose Tray
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps
below to remove jammed paper.
1 Press [ ].
Paper jam.
Press [ ] to
display steps.
(End: Press OK)
2 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out
gently.
If it cannot be removed easily, do not pull it out forcibly. Perform
the procedure at the position that is indicated on the message
display.
3 When the following screen appears, select <Yes>
using [ ] and press [OK].
The machine is ready to print.
Is all of the jammed
paper removed?
Yes No
Paper Jams in the Paper Drawer (Drawer
1 or 2)
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps
below to remove jammed paper.
1 Press [ ].
Press [OK] to exit the operation screen.
Paper jam.
Press [ ] to
display steps.
(End: Press OK)
2 Pull out the paper drawer halfway.
9-5
Troubleshooting
If paper is jammed in the optional paper drawer (Drawer 2), also
pull out this drawer halfway.
3 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out
gently.
4 Set the paper drawer.
If the optional paper drawer (Drawer 2) is installed, close the
optional paper drawer also.
5 When the following screen appears, select <Yes>
using [ ] and press [OK].
The machine is ready to print.
Is all of the jammed
paper removed?
Yes No
Paper Jams in the Back Cover and Duplex
Unit
Referring to the procedure on the display, follow the steps
below to remove jammed paper.
1 Press [ ].
Paper jam.
Press [ ] to
display steps.
(End: Press OK)
2 Open the back cover.
3 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out
gently.
4 Close the back cover.
5 Open the lower rear cover.
6 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out
gently.
7 Close the lower rear cover.
8 When the following screen appears, select <Yes>
using [ ] and press [OK].
The machine is ready to print.
Is all of the jammed
paper removed?
Yes No
Paper Jams in the Front Cover
1 Press [ ].
Press [OK] to exit the operation screen.
Paper jam.
Press [ ] to
display steps.
Close back cover
if it is open.
9-6
Troubleshooting
2 If you are using the multi-purpose tray, close it.
3 Open the front cover while holding down the
open button.
4 Remove the toner cartridge.
Immediately place the toner cartridge into the original protective
bag or wrap it with a thick cloth.
5 Hold the green tabs (A), and push the transport
guide forward and down.
Do not take your hands off the transport guide until it has reached
the original position in Step 7.
(A)
6 Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out
gently.
Remove it as horizontally as possible so that loose toner does not
spill out.
7 Slowly move the transport guide to its original
position.
8 Hold the part where the green seal is attached
and open the roller cover.
9 Remove the document by pulling it gently.
10
Put the roller cover back in place gently.
11
Insert the toner cartridge.
Fit (A) on both sides of the toner cartridge into the guides located
on both sides of the machine and slide the toner cartridge into the
machine until the toner cartridge comes to rest and is held against
the back of the machine.
(A)
(A)
12
Close the front cover.
Paper Jams in the 2-sided Transport Guide
1
Press [ ].
Press [OK] to exit the operation screen.
Paper jam.
Press [ ] to
display steps.
(End: Press OK)
2
Pull out the paper drawer.
9-7
Troubleshooting
3
Holding the green tabs (A), open the 2-sided
transport guide.
(A)
4
Remove the jammed paper by pulling it out
gently.
5 Holding the green tabs, close the 2-sided
transport guide securely.
Make sure that both ends of the paper exit guide are closed.
6 Set the paper drawer.
7 When the following screen appears, select <Yes>
using [ ] and press [OK].
The machine is ready to print.
Is all of the jammed
paper removed?
Yes No
9-8
Troubleshooting
If messages appear, see the following and solve the problem.
e-Manual → Troubleshooting → Onscreen Messages
Onscreen Message
9-9
Troubleshooting
An error code is a 3-digit code recorded in the error log when an error occurs.
You can view the code in the following reports and log:
Error codes
• Error send report
• Error receive report
• Job history displayed on the system status screen
＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊＊
＊＊＊ ＊＊＊
Error Report (Send)
Send job resulted in error.
Job No.
Address
Name
Start Time
Call Length
Sheets
Result
0123
0123456789
name
01/01 02:07 AM
01'15
1
NG
#018 Busy/No Signal
Error code
01/01/2011 02:07 PM FAX 123XXXXXXX CANON P.0001
For more information on the reports, refer to the following.
e-Manual → Basic Operation → Printing the Report Automatically (D1370/D1350 Only)
For details on the error code, see the following.
#001 Problem A document jam has occurred.
Action Remove the jammed document.
#003
Problem The machine is taking considerable time to send high-volume data.
Action 1 Reduce the scan resolution and try to send the document again.
Action 2 Reduce the scan resolution or ask the sender to split the document into smaller subsets and send one subset at a time.
#005
Problem 1 The receiving fax machine did not respond within 35 seconds.
Action Repeat the sending procedure from the beginning. Additionally, ask the recipient to check the fax machine. When making
an overseas call, add a pause to the fax number.
Problem 2 The receiving fax machine may not be a G3 fax machine.
Action Make sure the receiving fax machine is a G3 fax machine. If it is a G3 fax machine, send the document again. Otherwise,
switch to the communication mode supported by the receiving fax machine and send the document again.
#012 Problem The receiving fax machine is out of paper.
Action Make sure that there is enough paper loaded in the receiving fax machine's paper tray.
#018
Problem 1 No response is obtained after redialing the number. The line may be busy or disconnected.
Action
Wait a few seconds before trying to dial the number again. Make sure that the receiving fax machine is ready to receive a
document if you still cannot send a fax. Wait a few more seconds before trying to dial the number again if the line is still
busy.
Problem 2 You cannot send a fax because the line is busy or disconnected.
Action Make sure that the receiving fax machine is ready to receive a document and try to dial the number again.
Problem 3 The settings configured on the receiving fax machine may not be the same with your fax machine.
Action Make sure that the receiving fax machine is ready to receive a document and try to dial the number again.
Problem 4 No pause was added to the fax number when sending a fax overseas.
Action Add a pause after the country code or in front of the fax number and dial the number again. When sending a fax to a
destination registered in a one-touch key, switch to the overseas transmission mode on the detailed setup screen.
#022
Problem You are restricted to send faxes from your computer.
Action
You need to disable the restriction. Contact your administrator for more information.
e-Manual → Security → Restricting to Specify Destinations and Use the Sending Functions (D1370/D1350 Only) →
Restricting to Send Faxes from Your Computer
Error Codes
9-10
Troubleshooting
#037
Problem 1 The machine memory is full.
Action Print, send, or delete any documents stored in memory.
Problem 2 The data size exceeds the machine's memory capacity.
Action Reduce the data resolution or change the file format to reduce the data size.
Problem 3 The memory is full when using the secure printing.
Action Print the documents in several batches or send the job without using the secure printing.
e-Manual → Security → Entering PIN for Printing (Secure Printing) (D1370 Only) → Setting Secure Printing
#054
Problem 1 An abbreviation of the sender's name or sender's fax number is not registered when the sender sends a fax from a computer.
Action Register an abbreviation of the sender's name as well as the sender's fax number.
Problem 2 The destination number is more than 40 digits long when sending a fax from a computer or importing from the address
book.
Action Reduce the number of digits to less than 40.
#099 Problem A job currently being processed has been canceled manually.
Action Try to send or receive the document again.
#408
Problem 1 The memory media was disconnected while it was being written to, and writing failed.
Action Check to see if the memory media was disconnected, and try writing again.
Problem 2 An error occurs when transferring images to memory media, and images cannot be transferred normally.
Action Check the memory media status, and then repeat the operation.
Problem 3 The connected memory media is formatted with an unsupported file system.
Action Make sure that the memory media is formatted with a file system that is supported by the machine (FAT16 or FAT32).
#701
Problem 1 Failed the authentication of ID or PIN in the Departmental ID Management.
Action Specify the correct dept. ID or PIN and redo the authentication.
Problem 2 The jobs with unknown IDs are restricted.
Action
Need to deactivate the restriction. Contact the system manager (administrator) for the details
e-Manual → Security → Specifying the Setting for Department ID Management → Specifying Whether or Not to Receive
a Print Job from an Unknown ID
#703
Problem The image region in the memory is full. Cannot write.
Action 1 Wait until other TX jobs are completed before resending.
Action 2 Delete the documents saved in the memory. If it still does not work, please turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
Action 3 Split the document into smaller subsets and send it.
#752
Problem 1 The SMTP server name setting is incorrect.
Action
Select the appropriate SMTP server name.
e-Manual → Network Settings → Setting the Machine to Be Able To Send Scanned Documents (D1370 Only) →
Configuring E-Mail Send Settings
Problem 2 The domain name setting is incorrect.
Action
Select the appropriate domain name.
e-Manual → Network Settings → Additional Network Settings → Setting IPv4 DNS
e-Manual → Network Settings → Additional Network Settings → Setting IPv6 DNS
Problem 3 The network is not connected.
Action Check with your network administrator to make sure that the network is operating normally.
#753 Problem TCP/IP errors occur when sending files or e-mails. (socket and select errors, etc.)
Action Make sure that the network cable connector between the machine and the computer is plugged in securely.
#755
Problem 1 Cannot send because TCP/IP is not running properly.
Action Check <TCP/IP Settings>.
e-Manual → Network Settings
Problem 2 The IP address is not set.
Action Enter the IP address.
e-Manual → Network Settings → Basic Network Settings → Setting the IP Address
Problem 3 When the machine was started up, IP addresses were not assigned by either DHCP, RARP or BOOTP.
Action
After the machine is turned ON, the machine cannot communicate with the network until the time specified in <Startup
Settings> has elapsed. Wait a few seconds before resending.
e-Manual → Network Settings → Additional Network Settings → Specifying a Delay Before Establishing the Network
Connection
9-11
Troubleshooting
#801
Problem 1 Whenever it communicates with the SMTP server in order to send e-mail, a timeout caused by the mail server side occurs.
Action Check to make sure the SMTP is operating normally. Check the network status.
Problem 2 During SMTP connection, an error is returned from the SMTP server.
Action Recheck your SMTP server settings.
Problem 3 The destination setting is not correct.
Action Check the destination settings.
Problem 4 When sending to a file server, an error caused by the server side occurs.
Action Check to make sure the file server is operating normally.
#802
Problem The SMTP server name setting is incorrect.
Action
Select the appropriate SMTP server name.
e-Manual → Network Settings → Setting the Machine to Be Able To Send Scanned Documents (D1370 Only) →
Configuring E-Mail Send Settings
#804
Problem No access privileges to folder.
Action Make sure that the user name and password that is registered for the destination matches the user account (user name and
password) that is registered in the computer (file server).
#806
Problem 1 When sending to a file server, the specified user name and password are incorrect.
Action Make sure that the user name and password that is registered for the destination matches the user account (user name and
password) that is registered in the computer (file server).
Problem 2 When sending e-mail, the specified destination is incorrect.
Action Check the registered e-mail destination settings.
#810
Problem While connecting to the POP server, an error is returned from the POP server.
Action 1 Check to see if the POP server address is entered correctly.
Action 2 Check with your network administrator to make sure that the mail server is operating normally and that the network is
operating normally.
#812
Problem The POP password setting is incorrect.
Action Enter the correct POP password. Check the POP password in the settings notification documentation, etc. issued by the
contracted provider, or ask the network administrator.
#813 Problem The POP login name setting is incorrect.
Action Recheck your POP login name setting.
#822 Problem The job cannot be printed due to incorrect image format.
Action Repeat the operation.
#839
Problem The user name and password setting used for SMTP authentication is incorrect.
Action
Set the user name and password correctly.
e-Manual → Network Settings → Setting the Machine to Be Able To Send Scanned Documents (D1370 Only) →
Configuring E-Mail Send Settings
#846
Problem The error has occurred during the POP authentication.
Action
Recheck the setting and redo the operation.
e-Manual → Network Settings → Setting the Machine to Be Able To Send Scanned Documents (D1370 Only) →
Configuring E-Mail Send Settings
#852 Problem The error has occurred by shutting down the power switch while processing jobs.
Action Recheck the setting and redo the operation.
#853
Problem 1 The job was not able to be processed due to the reason why it was canceled from an application or operating system while
the print data was being sent to this machine from a computer etc.
Action Check the settings, and then repeat the operation.
Problem 2 While performing the secure printing, the job has been canceled for running out of time to process.
Action Start over the job as necessary.
Problem 3 The job using the secure printing has been sent when <Secure Print Settings> is turned <Off>.
Action Set <Secure Print Settings> to <On>. Or send the job without the secure printing.
e-Manual → Security → Entering PIN for Printing (Secure Printing) → Setting Secure Printing
#995 Problem A document waiting to be sent or received has been canceled.
Action Try to send or receive the document again.
9-12
Troubleshooting
This message appears when the paper size loaded in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray does not match the size specified in
<Drawer 1>, <Drawer 2>, or <Multi-Purpose Tray> in the <Paper Settings> menu. When this message appears, follow the steps in
the procedure below.
NOTE
Ignore the message and proceed to print
You can print on paper currently set in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray if you press [OK] to ignore the message. Note that this may cause
unexpected print results, for example, a part of the image may not be printed at all.
Changing the paper size in the <Paper Settings> menu to match the size loaded in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray
Cancel the job and refer to e-Manual → Basic Operation → Setting the Paper Size and Type → For the Paper Drawer, to
change the paper size in <Paper Settings> menu.
IMPORTANT
When printing from the printer driver
Make sure that the paper size specified in the printer driver also matches the size loaded in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.
Loading the paper size specified in the <Paper Settings> menu
See “Loading Paper” (→P. 2-9) and load the size specified in the <Paper Settings> menu.
When <Incorrect Size/Setting> Appears
9-13
Troubleshooting
If a problem occurs while the machine is in use, try the actions suggested in this section before contacting technical support
Check the Following First
Is the power switched ON?
Make sure that the power cord is securely plugged into the machine and into the wall outlet.
Make sure that electricity is supplied from the power cord.
Use another power cord or check to see if the cord is broken using a voltmeter.
Turn ON the power switch.
If this works
Has the power switch been just turned ON?
Wait a few moments until the machine starts and warms up.
If this works
Is the machine in the sleep mode?
Press [ ] (Energy Saver) on the operation panel to return from the sleep mode.
If this works
Are the settings properly configured?
If the machine makes the error sound and does not start operating even after [ ] (Start) has been pressed, the settings
may not have been configured properly. Check the configured settings.
Is the Error indicator on or blinking?
Make sure that paper is loaded properly in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray.
“Loading Paper” (→P. 2-9)
Check to see if there is a jam somewhere inside the machine.
“Clearing Jams” (→P. 9-2)
Turn OFF the power switch, wait 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
After the problem has been solved, the Error indicator goes out and the screen returns to the standby mode. If the Error
indicator keeps blinking, unplug the power cord and contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
If this works
Troubleshooting
9-14
Troubleshooting
Does a message appear on the screen?
If an error message appears on the screen, see the following section and try the appropriate action.
“Onscreen Message” (→P. 9-8)
Print the transmission management report to see if the report shows any errors.
e-Manual → Basic Operation → Printing List → Printing a Communication Management Report (D1370/D1350 Only)
If this works
Is the telephone line connected or configured properly? (D1370/D1350 Only)
Make sure that the telephone cable is properly connected. Make sure that the cables for the telephone line port and external device
port on the back of the machine are not connected inversely. See the Starter Guide.
Make sure that the line type (dial or push) specified in the menu matches the type of line connected to the machine.
“Select Line Type” (→P. 6-23)
Make sure that the telephone line is not receiving interference from nearby devices such as a microwave oven. This may affect
the status of the telephone line.
If You Cannot Solve a Problem
See “Troubleshooting” in the e-Manual, then solve the problem.
9-15
Troubleshooting
The machine cannot be used while the power supply is cut off.
When there is a power failure, you can or cannot perform the following fax operations.
• You cannot send or receive faxes.
• You may not be able to make a call using the external telephone, depending on your telephone system.
• You may be able to answer a call using the external telephone, depending on your telephone system.
IMPORTANT
To save documents in memory when the power supply is cut off
If the power is lost due to a power failure or the power cord is accidentally unplugged, data can be stored in memory for approximately 5 minutes
so you can back it up. To store document in the memory requires the printer’s built-in battery must be charged for more than 16 hours. (The
printer’s power switch is turned ON for more than 16 hours.)
When a Power Failure Occurs
9-16
Troubleshooting
NOTE
To contact your local authorized Canon dealer
When a problem occurs that is not suggested in the e-Manual, or a problem persists if you follow the instructions, or you cannot determine the
nature of the problem, contact your local authorized Canon dealer
Paper Curls
Try one of the following to solve the problem.
<Cause 1> Damp paper is used.
Solution 1 Replace the paper stack with new unopened one.
e-Manual → Specifications → Paper → Supported Paper Types
Solution 2
Follow the steps in the procedure below when plain paper (16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m2)) is loaded.
1. Access the [Page Setup] tab.
2. Set [Paper Type] to [Plain Paper L].
Solution 3
Change the <Special Mode V> setting from the operation panel.
e-Manual → Maintenance → Special Mode
The effect becomes greater as the number goes up.
<Off> → <Mode 1> → <Mode 2>
(low) (high)
* Paper curls and creases can be minimized by changing the paper type and usage conditions, without needing to
change the setting.
* The more effective the setting becomes, the slower the print speed.
<Cause 2> The paper type loaded is not appropriate.
Solution
Make sure that the number of sheets or the paper type loaded in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray meets the
paper specifications.
e-Manual → Specifications → Paper → Supported Paper Types
Printing Results Are Not Good
9-17
Troubleshooting
Paper Creases
Try one of the following to solve the problem.
<Cause 1> The paper stack is not loaded correctly.
Solution Load the paper stack correctly.
“Loading Paper” (→P. 2-9)
<Cause 2> Damp paper is used.
Solution Replace the paper stack with new unopened one.
e-Manual → Specifications → Paper → Supported Paper Types
<Cause 3> The paper type loaded is not appropriate.
Solution
Make sure that the number of sheets or the paper type loaded in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray meets the
paper specifications.
e-Manual → Specifications → Paper → Supported Paper Types
<Cause 4> There is a foreign object inside the machine.
Solution Remove the foreign object from the machine.
<Cause 5> Paper creases due to the paper type used or usage conditions of the machine.
Solution
Change the <Special Mode V> setting from the operation panel.
e-Manual → Maintenance → Special Mode
The effect becomes greater as the number goes up.
<Off> → <Mode 1> → <Mode 2>
(low) (high)
* Paper curls and creases can be minimized by changing the paper type and usage conditions, without needing to
change the setting.
* The more effective the setting becomes, the slower the print speed.
9-18
Troubleshooting
Vertical Streaks Appear on the Output
Try one of the following to solve the problem.
<Cause 1> Due to the paper type or usage conditions, vertical streaks appear on the output.
Solution 1 Replace the paper stack with new unopened one.
e-Manual → Specifications → Paper → Supported Paper Types
Solution 2
To copy
Change the <Special Mode Z> setting from the operation panel.
To print from USB Direct Print or a computer
For USB Direct Print, change the <Special Mode X> setting in the operation panel.
To print from a computer, change the [Special Print Adjustment] setting in the print driver.
e-Manual → Maintenance → Special Mode
The effect becomes greater as the number goes up.
<Off> → <Mode 1> → <Mode 2> → <Mode 3>
(low) (high)
* Streaks can be minimized by changing the paper type or usage conditions, without needing to change the setting.
* The more effective the setting, the lower the density becomes. Additionally, the outline of text and images may be
reproduced less clearly, and images may appear slightly jagged.
* If you cannot solve the problem even setting <Special Mode X>, set <Special Mode D> to <On>.
Solution 3
To print received faxes or the print report
Change the <Special Mode C> setting to <On> from the operation panel.
To apply the solutions to all the jobs
Change the <Special Mode D> setting to <On> in the print driver.
e-Manual → Maintenance → Special Mode
* Streaks can be minimized by changing the paper type or usage conditions, without needing to change the setting.
* If you set this option to <On>, the printing speed will be slow.
<Cause 2> The toner cartridge was replaced recently, or the machine has not printed anything for an extended period of
time.
Solution
Change the setting of <Special Mode B> from the operation panel.
e-Manual → Maintenance → Special Mode
The effect becomes greater as the number goes up.
<Off> → <Mode 1> → <Mode 2> → <Mode 3>
(low) (high)
* Streaks can be minimized by changing the paper type or usage conditions, without needing to change the setting.
* If you set this option to <On>, the printing speed will be slow.
9-19
Troubleshooting
Toner Smudges and Spatters Appear around Text and Images
Try one of the following to solve the problem.
<Cause 1> The paper type loaded is not appropriate.
Solution
Make sure that the number of sheets or the paper type loaded in the paper drawer or multi-purpose tray meets the
paper specifications.
e-Manual → Specifications → Paper → Supported Paper Types
<Cause 2> Due to the paper type (for example, heavy paper) or usage conditions (for example, dry conditions), toner
smudges and spatters appear on the output.
Solution
Change the <Special Mode U> setting to <On> from the operation panel.
e-Manual → Maintenance → Special Mode
* Set this setting to <Off> unless the above mentioned problem occurs.
* The print quality may become lower when this setting is enabled, depending on the paper type used (for example,
thin paper) or usage conditions (humid conditions).
The Bottom Edge of Paper or Following Paper Has Smudge Marks
Perform following procedure.
<Cause> A document with no margins was printed.
Solution 1 Data is printed with a margin of 5 mm (10 mm for envelopes). Provide a margin around the data.
“Printable Area” (→P. 2-8)
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Set [Enlarge Print Area] to [Off].
9-20
Troubleshooting
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed
Perform one of the following solutions according to the cause.
<Cause> A document with no margins was printed.
Solution 1 Data is printed with a margin of 5 mm (10 mm for envelopes). Provide a margin around the data.
“Printable Area” (→P. 2-8)
Solution 2
Perform the following procedure in the printer driver.
1. Display the [Finishing] tab.
2. Click [Advanced Settings].
3. Set [Enlarge Print Area] to [Off].
9-21
Troubleshooting
Customer Support (U.S.A.)
If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information
in this chapter, contact the Canon Customer Care Center at
1-800-OK-CANON, Monday through Friday, between 8:00 A.M.
and 8:00 P.M. EST. On-line support is available 24 hours a day at
http://www.canontechsupport.com.
Please have the following information ready when
contacting the Canon Customer Care Center:
• Product name (imageCLASS D1370/D1350/D1320)
• Serial number (a character string of 3 letters and a 5-digit
number; located on the rating label on the rear side of the
machine or on the label on inside of the machine’s front
cover)
Rating label
• Place of purchase
• Nature of the problem
• Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results
IMPORTANT
If you attempt to fix the machine yourself
It may void the limited warranty.
Customer Support (Canada)
Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical
support options*:
* Available support options are subject to change without notice.
• To perform step-by-step troubleshooting, send e-mail to
technical support, download drivers or support documents,
or view answers to frequently asked questions, visit http://
www.canon.ca/
• Free live technical support is available from 9 A.M. to 8
P.M. EST, Monday through Friday (excluding holidays), for
products still under warranty 1-800-OK-CANON
• To find the location of the authorized service facility nearest
you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or call 1- 800-OK-CANON.
• If the problem cannot be corrected via these technical
support options, repair options are available from the
technical support personnel via the website at http://www.
canon.ca/
Please have the following information ready when
contacting the Canon Customer Care Center:
• Product name (imageCLASS D1370/D1350/D1320)
• Serial number (a character string of 3 letters and a 5-digit
number; located on the rating label on the rear side of the
machine or on the label on inside of the machine’s front
cover)
Rating label
• Place of purchase
• Nature of problem
• Steps you have taken to solve the problem and the results
IMPORTANT
If you attempt to fix the machine yourself
It may void the limited warranty.
When a Problem Cannot Be Resolved
WARNING
If the machine makes strange noises or emits smoke or
an odd odor
Turn OFF the power switch immediately, disconnect the
power cord, and contact the Canon Customer Care Center.
Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine
yourself.
WARNING
If the machine makes strange noises or emits smoke or
an odd odor
Turn OFF the power switch immediately, disconnect the
power cord, and contact the Canon Customer Care Center.
Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the machine
yourself.
9-22
Troubleshooting
10-1
Chapter 10
Registering/Setting the Various Functions
You can set or change machine functions from the setting menu according to your purpose.
Setting Menu List 10-2
Printing a User Data List 10-2
Contents of the Setting Menu 10-2
10-2
Registering/Setting the Various Functions
Printing a User Data List
Contents of the Setting Menu
MM/DD/YYYY
DD/MM YYYY
YYYY MM/DD
P.1-12
Timer Settings
Date Display Type
Time&Date Settings
This area represents the first hierarchy in the menu.
This area represents hierarchies for "setting item."
This area represents
hierarchies for "setting values."
The setting values with the
gray background or of the
boldface represents the default
settings.
These represents reference areas in this manual.
For the items with the icon, see the e-Manual.
Register the size and type of the
paper to be used.
You can also register a custom paper
size.
[Select Paper/Settings] key
Configure the machine settings.
You can perform adjustment and
cleaning.
[Menu] key
You can specify the settings for
various report output conditions and
output a report.
[Report] key
Returns to the previous hierarchy.
Proceeds to the next hierarchy.
Selects an upper item/setting value.
Selects a lower item/setting value.
Proceeds to the next hierarchy. Also, a setting
value is determined, and an operation is performed.
* When <Apply> appears in the screen, you need to select <Apply>
and press [OK] after specifying the setting.
Returns to the previous hierarchy.
Resets the settings. (Resets the copy/scan/fax/USB
direct print mode.)
Menu Operations
Back
Reset
Viewing the Route Map
Register the following types of destination.
- One-touch keys
- Coded dialing
- Group dialing
[Address Book] key
Press [ ] (Menu) to exit the menu screen and return to the default screen.
About the menu options in the following chart
• The settings marked with "*1" are only for D1370.
• The settings marked with "*2" are only for D1370/D1350.
• For values with "*3" mark, the default value varies depending on the country where you are using the machine.
• The settings marked with "*4" cannot be imported or exported via the Remote UI.
Setting Menu List
To see the contents of current settings, print out user’s data list.
Keys to be used for this operation
OK
Report
1 Press [ ] (Report).
2 Select <Print Reports> using [ ] or [ ] and press
[OK].
Reports
Reports Settings
Print Reports
3 Select <User Data List> using [ ] or [ ] and
press [OK].
Print Reports
Address Book List
User Data List
System Manager Data...
Communication Manag...
4 Make sure that paper is loaded in the paper
source and press [OK].
Load the displayed paper size.
Supported Paper:
Size: A4, LTR
Type: Pln, Rec, Clr
OK
5 Select <Yes> using [ ] and press [OK].
Printing starts.
Print User Data
List?
NoYes
6 Press [ ] (Report) to close <Print Report>
screen.
10-3
Registering/Setting the Various Functions
Keys to be used for this operation
2
Keys to be used for this operation
3
2
1
4
1
<How to display>
Press [FAX] or [SCAN]. Press [Address Book].
The address book is displayed. Press [ ] to select [ ], and then press [OK].
Coded Dial
Max 16 characters
Address Book (D1370/D1350 Only)
12
3 4
Menu
12
<How to display>
Press [Menu]. The setting menu is displayed.
Fax
E-Mail
Name
Coded Dial:Registration No.
Max 40
Destination
Max 16 characters
Max 16 characters
Max 120 characters
Group
Name
Name
Select Coded Dial/One-Touch Dial
Destination
Destination
Coded Dial:Registration No.
E-Mail
Max 16 characters
Max 120 characters
Name
Destination
One-Touch:Registration No.
Set Details
ECM TX
Speed
Off
On
33600 bps
14400 bps
9600 bps
Long Distance Domestic
International (1)
International (2)
International (3)
P.5-6
One-Touch
Max 16 characters
Fax
Name
Enter Registration No.
One-Touch:Registration No.
Max 40
Destination
Max 16 characters
Group
Name
Enter Registration No.
Enter Registration No.
Select Coded Dial/One-Touch Dial
Destination
One-Touch:Registration No.
Set Details
ECM TX
Speed
Off
On
Long Distance Domestic
International (1)
International (2)
International (3)
P.5-3
Network Settings
Keys to be used for this operation
Paper Settings
<How to display>
Press [Select Paper/Settings].
4800 bps
33600 bps
14400 bps
9600 bps
4800 bps
IPv4 Settings
IPv6 Settings
TCP/IP Settings
IP Address Settings
PING Command
Auto Obtain
Select Protocol
Manual Obtain
IP Address
Off
DHCP
Auto IP Off
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0
Gateway Address
View Settings
Auto Obtain
IP Address
Off
On
DNS Dynamic Updt. Time:0 to 24 to 48(hr.)
Primary DNS Server
Secondary DNS Server
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
0.0.0.0
On
BOOTP
RARP
Off
On
View Settings
DNS Settings
DNS Server Settings
mDNS Settings
Use IPv6
Off
On
View Settings
Stateless Address Settings
Off
On
View Settings
Use DHCPv6
Off
On
Host Name
Domain Name
DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings
DNS Dynamic Update Settings
mDNS Name
DHCP Option Settings
Acquire Host Name: Off, On
DNS Dynamic Update: Off, On
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Continues to the next page
Coded Dial:Registration No.
“Setting the Paper Size and Type” (→P. 2-14)
10-4
Registering/Setting the Various Functions
Off
On
- TX Done Volume: 1 to 3
Only When Error Occurs
- TX Done Volume: 1 to 3
Off
On
- RX Done Volume: 1 to 3
Only When Error Occurs
- RX Done Volume: 1 to 3
Off
On
- Scanning Done Volume:
1 to 3
Only When Error Occurs
- Scanning Done Volume:
1 to 3
Preferences
Sound Volume Control
Continues to the next page
Off
Display Settings
Energy Saver Alert
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Copy
Fax
Scan
USB Direct Print
English
French
Spanish
Portuguese
English
-3 to 0 to +3
French
Spanish
Portuguese
Off
On
Invert Screen Colors
mm
Inch
mm/Inch Entry Switch
Fax Tone*2
Select Default Screen
Language
Remote UI Language
Contrast
-4 to 0
Brightness
- Fax Volume: 1 to 3
Entry Tone
Off
On
Off
On
Restock Supplies Tone
Invalid Entry Tone
Warning Tone
Job Done Tone
Ring Tone*2
- Ring Tone Volume: 1 to 3
TX Done Tone*2
RX Done Tone*2
Scanning Done Tone*2
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
Use WSD Print: Off, On
Use WSD Browsing: Off, On
Use WSD Scan: Off, On
Use Computer Scan: Off, On
LPD Settings Off
Auto Detect
MAC Address
On
Use HTTP Off
On
SNMPv3 Settings Off
On
Printer Management Information From Host
Off
On
Off
On
MTU Size 1300, 1400, 1500
On
Port Number Settings
LPD: 1 to 515 to 65535
RAW: 1 to 9100 to 65535
HTTP: 0 to 80 to 65535
POP3 RX
*1
: 1 to 110 to 65535
RAW Settings Off
On
WSD Settings
WSD Print Settings:
WSD Scan Settings:
Off
On
Use Multicast Discovery:
Off
- Communication Mode:
Half Duplex, Full Duplex
- Ethernet Type:10 Base-T,
100 Base-TX
Continues from the previous page Continues from the previous page
Continues to the next page
WINS Settings WINS Resolution: Off, On
(WINS Server Address: 0.0.0.0)
Scope ID
HTTP: 1 to 80 to 65535
SMTP TX
*1
: 1 to 25 to 65535
SNMP: 1 to 161 to 65535
WSD Search: 1 to 3702 to 65535
SNMP Settings
SNMPv1 Settings
Ethernet Driver Settings
Dedicated Port Settings
Off
On
IEEE802.1X Settings
0 to 300 (sec.)
Startup Settings
Off
On
Community Name 1: Public
Community Name 2: Not Set
MIB Access Permission 1: Read
Only, Read/Write
MIB Access Permission 2: Read
Only, Read/Write
Dedicated Community Settings:
Off, Read/Write, Read Only
Gram
Pound
Gram/Pound Switch
Auto
Manual
Cursor Movement*2
Normal
Fast
1 to 2 to 5 (seconds)
Message Display Time
Slow
Scrolling Speed
DNS Settings
DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings
DNS Dynamic Update Settings
Use IPv4 Host/Domain
On
Off
Off
- Host Name
- Domain Name
On
- Register Manual Address: Off, On
- Register Stateful Address: Off,On
- Register Stateless Address: Off, On
- DNS Dynamic Update Time: 0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)
mDNS Settings Off
On
- Use IPv4 Name for mDNS: Off (mDNS Name), On
10-5
Registering/Setting the Various Functions
Multi-Purpose Tray: Off, On
Drawer 1:Off, On
Drawer 2*:Off, On
Pause Time
RX Function Settings
3 to 5 to 240 (minutes)
GMT-12:00 to GMT-5:00
to GMT+12:00
Sleep Timer
(0=Off)
1 to 2 to 9 (minutes)
Auto Reset Timer
Default Screen
Selected Screen
Screen After Auto Reset
(0=Off)
1 to 5 to 60 (minutes)
Auto Offline Time
1 to 2 to 15 (seconds)
-4 to 0 to 4
1 to 2 to 10 (times)
2 to 99 (minutes)
1 to 99 (Copies)
Change Defaults
Register Unit Name (Fax)
Off
On
ECM TX
Off
On
Off
On
On Image
Above Image
FAX
TEL
Auto Redial
Off
On
Sender ID
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Check Dial Tone Before Sending
TX Function Settings
Continues to the upper right
Continues from the previous page Continues from the lower left
Off
On
ECM RX
Change Defaults
Change Defaults
Register Unit Name (E-Mail)
Off
Incoming Ring
Timer Settings
Time & Date Settings
Drawer Auto Selection
Copy Settings
Change Defaults
12 Hour (AM/PM)
24 Hour
12/24 Hour Clock
Off
Daylight Savings
Time Zone Settings
Current Time Settings*4
MM/DD/YYYY
DD/MM YYYY
YYYY MM/DD
Date Display Type
Fax Settings (D1370/D1350 Only)
Basic Settings
Off
On
Pulse, Tone
Off-Hook Alarm
Register Unit Telephone Number
Select Line Type
Continues to the next page
On
- Ring Times: 1 to 2 to 99
(times)
Off
Remote RX
On
- Remote RX ID: 00 to 25 to
99
Off
Auto RX Switch
On
- Incoming Ring Time: 1 to
15 to 99 (seconds)
On
- Start (M/W/D)
- End (M/W/D) RX Print Settings
Fax Setup Guide*4
Off
On
Off
On
2-Sided Printing
Off
Reduce RX Size
On
- Reduction Ratio: Auto, 97,
95, 90, 75 (%)
RX Page Footer
Off
On
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low
- Reduction Method:
Vertical/Horizontal, Vertical
Only
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4,
Gamma 1.8, Gamma 2.2
- Image Quality in
Text/Photo, Photo Mode:
Data Size Priority, Normal,
Image Quality Priority
- Image Quality in Text
Mode: Data Size Priority,
Normal, Image Quality
Priority
Name (Ascending), Name
(Descending), Date/Time
(Ascending), Date/Time
(Descending)
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
P.1-12
P.1-11
P.3-12
Common Settings
TX Function Settings*1
Color Send Gamma Value
PDF (Compact) Image Level
Output File Image Settings
Density
Toner Save
Off
On
Image Refinement
Print Quality
Memory Media Settings
Scan Settings
Change Defaults
File Sort Default Settings
LTR, LGL, STMT, EXEC,
No. 10 (COM10), Monarch,
DL, ISO-C5, ISO-B5, A4, A5,
B5
Default Paper Size*1
Short File Name, Long File
Name
File Name Format
Copies*1
2-Sided Printing*1
Off
On
Paper Size Override
USB Direct Print Settings
Printer Settings
Copy
Multi-Purpose Tray: Print Speed Priority, Print Side Priority
Drawer 1: Print Speed Priority, Print Side Priority
Drawer 2* : Print Speed Priority, Print Side Priority
Switch Paper Feed Method
Multi-Purpose Tray: Off, On
Drawer 1:Off, On
Drawer 2*:Off, On
Fax (D1370/D1350 Only)
Multi-Purpose Tray: Off, On
Drawer 1:Off, On
Drawer 2*:Off, On
Other
Drawer 1:Off, On
Drawer 2*:Off, On
Printer
Long Edge, Short Edge
Binding Location
-1.90 to 0.00 to 1.90 (inches)
Gutter
-2.00 to 0.00 to 2.00 (inches)
Offset Short Edge (Front)
Layout*1
Settings or values with a "*" mark may not appear depending on the availability of the optional
accessories.
- Off-Hook Alarm Volume:
1 to 3
Redial Times
Redial Interval
Redial When Err Occurs
Print Location
E-Mail
Windows (SMB)
Mark No. as: TEL/FAX
10-6
Registering/Setting the Various Functions
Continues from the lower left
Continues to the upper right Continues to the next page
United States (US)*3
Canada (CA)
Off, On, Only When Error Occurs
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Special Processing
Off
On
Special Mode U
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Special Mode V
Special Mode X*
1
*
CD-ROM
Off
On
Special Mode C*
Off
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
Special Mode B
Off
On
Special Mode D
Off
On
Off
On
Clean Fixing Unit
Clean Feeder
P.8-2
P.8-3
Select Country/Region*
4
Continues from the previous page
-2.00 to 0.00 to 2.00 (inches)
Offset Long Edge (Front)
-2.00 to 0.00 to 2.00 (inches)
Offset Short Edge (Back)
-2.00 to 0.00 to 2.00 (inches)
Offset Long Edge (Back)
Auto Error Skip*1
Paper Save
Off
Timeout*15 to 15 to 300 (Seconds)
Personality*1Auto, PS, PCL
PCL*1
PS*1
Copy Image Adjustment
Printer Density
Black Text Processing for Color
Toner Saver Mode
On
Off
On
Custom Paper Off
On
Unit of Measure Millimeters
Inches
Append CR to LF Yes
No
Enlarge A4 Print Width
Orientation Portrait
Font Number 0 to 56
Point Size
4.00 to 012.00 to 999.75 (point)
Pitch 0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 (cpi)
Form Lines 5 to 60 to 128 (lines)
X dimension 3 to 8_1/2 (inches)
Y dimension 5 to 14_0/0 (inches)
0 to 3600 (Seconds)
Color Tone, Resolution, Gradation, High Resolution
Color Tone, Resolution, Gradation, High Resolution
Color Tone, Resolution, Gradation, High Resolution
Symbol Set
Landscape
PC8, PC850, PC852, PC8DN, PC8TK, PIFONT,
PSMATH, PSTEXT, ROMAN8, VNINTL, VNMATH,
VNUS, WIN30, WINBALT, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5,
DESKTOP, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21, ISO4,
ISO6, ISO60, ISO69, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5,
ISOL6, LEGAL, MATH8, MCTEXT, MSPUBL,
PC1004, PC775
Text
Send Filter
Receive Filter
Graphics
Images (e.g. photographic images)
Resolution, Gradation, High Resolution
Resolution, Gradation, High Resolution
Resolution, Gradation, High Resolution
Text
Graphics
Images (e.g. photographic images)
Halftones
Off
On
Print PS Errors Off
On
Halftones
Job Timeout
-3 to 0 to +3
Feeder
-3 to 0 to +3
Platen Glass
Adjustment/Maintenance
*Only for media printing and printing from PS/PCL printer driver.
Special Mode Z*
*Only for copying.
*Only for printing received fax and report printing.
System Manager Information Settings
System Manager ID: Up to seven digits
System Manager PIN: Up to seven digits
System Manager Name: Up to 32 characters
Device Information Settings
Device Name: Up to 32 characters
Network Settings
Location: Up to 32 characters
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
System Settings
Dept. ID Management On/Off
Security Settings
Use SSL
IPv4 Address Filter
Off
On
Off
On
Send Filter
Receive Filter
IPv6 Address Filter
Off
On
Off
On
Send Filter
Receive Filter
MAC Address Filter
Off
On
Off
On
TX Start Speed: 33600 bps, 14400 bps,
9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
RX Start Speed: 33600 bps, 14400 bps,
9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps
Memory Lock PIN
Off
On
Communication Management Settings*
2
Forwarding Settings*
4
Off
On
Off
On
Remote UI On/Off*
4
Fax Settings
Store/Print When Forwarding
Print Images
Do Not Store, Only When Error Occurs
Store Images in Memory
Restrict TX Function*
2
Address Book PIN
Restrict New Destinations
Off
On
Allow Fax Driver TX
Memory Lock Settings
Print Report
Off
On
- Memory Lock Start Time
- Memory Lock End Time
Memory Lock Time:Not Set
Brazil (BR)
Mexico (MX)
Other
P.10-3
10-7
Registering/Setting the Various Functions
Keys to be used for this operation
FAX, UFRII LT, UFRII LT
(XPS), PCL5, PCL6, PS
Preferences
Timer Settings
Common Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
Scan Settings
USB Direct Print Settings
Initialize Menu
Continues from the previous page
Report With TX Image
Off
On
Print Reports
Off
On
Only When Error Occurs
TX Result Report
Coded Dial
One-Touch
Group
Address Book List*
2
Off
On
Only When Error Occurs
RX Result Report
User Data List
System Manager Data List
PCL Font List *
1
PS Font List *
1
Communication Management Report*
2
Dept. ID Management Report
Communication Management Report
Reports Settings*2
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
Auto Print (40 Transmissions) Off
On
Separate TX/RX Off
On
Reports
1
2
<How to display>
Press [Report].
The report output menu is displayed.
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
CD-ROM
Off
On
Restrict History TX
Off
On
On
Off
On
Fax No. Confirmation Re-Entry
Off
Restrict Sequential Broadcast
Off
Network
UFRII LT, UFRII LT (XPS),
PCL5, PCL6, PS
USB
System Administrator Settings
Device Information Settings
Dept. ID Management On/Off
Security Settings
Communication Management Settings
Forwarding Settings
Store/Print When Forwarding
Remote UI On/Off
Restrict TX Function
Display Job History On/Off
USB Device On/Off
Memory Media Storage On/Off
USB Direct Print On/Off
Display Job History
Off
On
USB Device On/Off
Off
On
Memory Media Storage On/Off
Off
On
USB Direct Print On/Off
Off
On
Secure Print Settings*1
Select PDL (Plug-n-Play)*1
Update Firmware
Initialize Key and Certificate
Initialize Address Book*2
Initialize System Settings
Secure Print Del. Time:
10 to 30 to 240 (min.)
Select PDL (Plug-n-Play)
All of the above
Printer Settings
CD-ROM
Initialize All
CD-ROM
Confirm Sequential Broadcast
Reject Sequential Broadcast
Network Settings
Secure Print Settings
One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Confirmation
2
1
10-8
Registering/Setting the Various Functions
11-1
Chapter 11
Appendix
This section describes the specifications of the machine and information for Macintosh users.
Main Specifications 11-2
Machine Specifications 11-2
Copy Specifications 11-2
Printer Specification 11-2
Scanner Specifications 11-3
Fax Specifications (D1370/D1350 Only) 11-3
Telephone Specifications (D1370/D1350 Only) 11-3
Transmission Specification (D1370 Only) 11-3
Optional Drawer 11-3
For Macintosh Users 11-4
Displaying Driver Guides 11-4
Displaying a Driver’s Help System 11-4
Content of the e-Manual about Features that Are Unavailable on the
Macintosh 11-4
Index 11-5
11-2
Appendix
Machine Specifications
Machine Specifications
Type Personal Desktop
Power Supply
120 to 127 V, 60 Hz (Power requirements can
vary by country. They depend on where you
purchased the product.)
Power Consumption
• Maximum: 1,100 W or less
• Average consumption during standby
mode: Approx. 9 W
• Average consumption during sleep mode:
Approx. 2.3 W
• When the main power switch is turned OFF
0.1 W or less
Warm-up Time
11 seconds or less*
(Temperature: 68 °F (20 °C), humidity: 65%
RH ; from when the machine is turned ON
using the main power switch to when the
standby screen is displayed)
* Warm-up time may vary depending
on the conditions of the installation
environment.
Weight
• D1370/D1350
Main unit (the toner cartridge included):
Approx. 47.2 lb (21.4 kg)
• D1320
Main unit (the toner cartridge included):
Approx. 46.7 lb (21.2 kg)
Dimensions
(W x L x H)
• In the normal state
17 3/4” x 18 5/8” x 18 3/8”
(450 mm x 472 mm x 465 mm)
• When the optional drawer is installed
17 3/4” x 18 5/8” x 23 3/4”
(450 mm x 472 mm x 603 mm)
Installation Space
(W x L x H)
• In the normal state
25 5/8” x 52 7/8” x 32 1/2”
(650 mm x 1,341 mm x 824 mm)
• When the optional drawer is installed
25 5/8” x 52 7/8” x 37 7/8”
(650 mm x 1,341 mm x 962 mm)
Environmental
Conditions
Temperature: 50 to 86°F (10 to 30°C)
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH (no condensation)
Acceptable
Documents See “Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
Acceptable Paper
Stock See “Supported Paper Types” (→P. 2-6)
Printable Area See “Printable Area” (→P.2-8 )
Scan Area See “Scan Area” (→P. 2-3)
Copy Specifications
Copy Specifications
Scan Resolution
• Text/Photo: 300 dpi x 600 dpi
• Text/Photo (Quality), Photo, Text: 600 dpi
x 600 dpi
Output Resolution 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Copy Ratio
• Direct 1:1 ± 1.0 %
• Enlargement 1:4.00, 1:2.00, 1:1.29
• Reduction 1:0.78, 1:0.64, 1:0.50, 1:0.25
• Zoom 0.25 to 4.00, 1% increments
Copy Speed (Letter
Plain Direct)* 35 cpm
Continuous Copying
Capacity Maximum 99 copies
First Copy Time
(Letter) 8 seconds or less
* The copy speed on Letter size plain paper on one-side printing
is measured during continuous copying. Copy speeds vary
depending on the paper type and size, as well as the paper feeding
direction. Copy speeds on smaller paper sizes may be slower.
Plus, the machine may experience downtime or decrease the
copy speed in the middle of a continuous copy run to adjust the
temperature inside the machine or maintain the optimal print
quality.
Printer Specification
Printer Specification
Printing Method Indirect electrostatic system (On-demand
fixing)
Paper Capacity
Multi-purpose tray: Approx. 50 sheets (16 to
23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m²))
Paper drawer: Approx. 500 sheets (16 to 23
lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m²))
Cassette Feeding Unit-U1 (Optional):
Approx. 500 sheets (16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to
89 g/m²))
Output Tray Capacity
(a fresh stack of
Letter size paper)
Output tray: Approx. 150 sheets (20 lb Bond
(75 g/m²))*1
Sub Output tray: 1 sheet
Print Speed (Letter
Plain Direct)*235 ppm
First Print Time
(Letter) 6 seconds or less*3
Output Resolution Equivalent to 1200dpi x 600dpi
Gradation 256 gradations
Toner Cartridge See “Replacing Toner Cartridges” (→P. 8-5)
* 1 The actual paper capacity varies depending on the installation
environment and paper type used.
* 2 The print speed on Letter size plain paper on one-side printing is
measured during continuous printing. Print speeds vary depending
on the paper type and size, as well as the paper feeding direction.
Print speeds on smaller paper sizes may be slower. Plus, the
machine may experience downtime or decrease the print speed
in the middle of a continuous print run to adjust the temperature
inside the machine or maintain the optimal print quality.
* 3 May vary depending on the output environment.
Main Specifications
11-3
Appendix
Scanner Specifications
Scanner Specifications
Type Color scanner
Maximum Scan Size
• Platen glass: up to 8 1/2” x 14” (215.9 mm
x 355.6 mm)
• Feeder: up to 8 1/2” x 14” (215.9 mm x
355.6 mm)
Scan Resolution
• Optical resolution
Platen glass: up to 600 x 600 dpi
Feeder: up to 300 x 300 dpi
• z
Scan Speed (Letter,
300 x 300 dpi)*
• Color: 10 sheets/minute
• Black and White: 29 sheets/minute
Host Interface
• 100 Base-TX
• 10 Base-T
• Hi-Speed USB
• USB
Operating System • Windows XP/Vista/7/8
• Mac OS 10.5.8 or later
Driver
• TWAIN
• WIA 1.0 (Windows XP)
• WIA 2.0 (Windows Vista/7/8)
• ICA (Mac OS X 10.6.x)
* Scan speeds were only measured.
Fax Specifications (D1370/D1350 Only)
Fax Specifications
Line Used
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)
*1
Communication Mode G3
Compression
Method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Modem Speed 33.6 Kbps
Automatic Fallback
Transmission Speed
Approx. 3 seconds per page*2
(ECM-JBIG, transmitting from the memory
at 33.6 Kbps)
Sending from
Memory/Receiving in
Memory
Maximum approx. 512 pages*2
(Total pages of transmission/reception)
(Maximum number of fax jobs that can be
sent from the memory: 10 jobs/Maximum
number of fax jobs that can be received into
the memory: 30 jobs)
Fax Resolution
• (Normal): 200 dpi x 100 dpi
• (Fine): 200 dpi x 200 dpi
• (Photo): 200 dpi x 200 dpi
• (Superfine): 200 dpi x 400 dpi
• (Ultrafine): 400 dpi x 400 dpi
Dialing
• One-touch keys (19 destinations)
• Coded dialing (181 destinations)
• Group dialing (199 destinations)
• Address book dialing
• Regular dialing (with numeric keys)
• Automatic redialing
• Manual redialing
• Sequential broadcast (210 destinations)
Receiving • Automatic reception
• Remote reception by telephone (Default ID: 25)
Reports
• Send Results
• Transmission management report (Auto
output every 40 destinations)
• RX Results
*1 The Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) currently supports
28.8 Kbps modem speed or lower. Note that speeds can vary
depending on the telephone line conditions.
*2 Based on ITU-T (ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector)
Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode.
Telephone Specifications (D1370/D1350 Only)
Telephone Specifications
Telephone Type External telephone/External telephone with
the built-in answer function/Data modem
Transmission Specification (D1370 Only)
Specification for File Server Transmission
Communication
Protocol SMB (TCP/IP)
Data Format PDF (Compact), PDF, JPEG, TIFF
Resolution
Resolutions for data formats are;
JPEG TIFF PDF PDF (Compact)
Black
and
White
300
dpi
300 dpi
(MMR
Compression)
300 dpi
(MMR
Compression)
Text: 300
dpi
Background:
150 dpi
Color 300
dpi
300 dpi
(JPEG
Compression)
200 dpi
(JPEG
Compression)
Text: 300
dpi
Background:
150 dpi
System
Environment
• Windows XP/Vista/7/8/Server 2003/Server
2008/Server 2012
• Solaris Version 2.6 or later (with Samba 2.2 or
later)
• Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later (with Samba 2.2 or
later)
• Mac OS X (Mac OS X 10.7 is not supported.)
Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Color Mode Color, Black/White
Inputted Image Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Paper Size LTR/LGL/STMT
Specification for E-mail Sending
Communication
Protocol SMTP*
Data Format PDF (Compact), PDF
Resolution
Resolutions for data formats are;
PDF PDF (Compact)
Black and White 300 dpi
(MMR Compression)
Text: 300 dpi
Background:150 dpi
Color 200 dpi
(JPEG Compression)
Text: 300 dpi
Background:150 dpi
System
Environment
• Windows XP/Vista/7/8/Server 2003/Server
2008/Server 2012
• Solaris Version 2.6 or later (with Samba 2.2 or later)
• Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later (with Samba 2.2 or later)
• Mac OS X
Interface 100BASE-TX, 10BASE-T
Color Mode Color, Black/White
Inputted Image Text, Text/Photo, Photo
Paper Size LTR/LGL/STMT
* POP3 is available to use only when authenticating before sending
Optional Drawer
Cassette Feeding Unit-U1
Paper Capacity 500 sheets (16 to 23 lb Bond (60 to 89 g/m²))
Available Paper See “Supported Document Types” (→P. 2-2)
Power Supply From main unit
Dimensions
(W x L x H)
17 3/4” x 18 5/8” x 6 5/8” (450 mm x 472 mm x
166.3 mm
Weight Approx. 11.5 lb (5.2 kg)
11-4
Appendix
Displaying Driver Guides
Double-click the following HTML files from the [Documents]
folder on the provided CD-ROM.
●Canon MF Printer Driver Guide
→ [Documents] - [english] - [Print] - [Guide] - [index.html]
●Canon PS Printer Driver Guide
→ [Documents] - [english] - [Print(PS)] - [Guide] - [index.
html]
●Canon Fax Driver Guide (D1370/D1350 Only)
→ [Documents] - [english] - [FAX] - [Guide] - [index.html]
●Canon Scanner Driver Guide
→ [Documents] - [english] - [Scan] - [Guide] - [index.html]
Displaying a Driver’s Help System
You can use drivers’ help systems after you install each driver.
●Printer Driver’s Help
For details about every feature and option in the driver,
refer to the Help.
After installing the driver, you can display the Help by
clicking [ ] in the [Print] dialog box.
Fax Driver’s Help (D1370/D1350 Only)
For details about every feature and option in the driver,
refer to the Help.
After installing the driver, you can display the Help by
clicking [ ] in the [Print] dialog box.
Content of the e-Manual about Features
that Are Unavailable on the Macintosh
Among the features explained in the e-Manual, the followings
are unavailable on the Macintosh.
●Installing or uninstalling the e-Manual
Reference in the MF Driver
Installation Guide
“Installing the MF Drivers and MF
Toolbox”
“Uninstalling the e-Manual”
●Accessory software
• Presto! PageManager
Reference in the MF Driver
Installation Guide “About the Drivers and Software”
●Using WSD network
Reference in the MF Driver
Installation Guide
“Installing the MF Drivers on the WSD
Network”
●Some print features
<Examples>
• Operating in the print server environment
• Watermark printing
• PageComposer (Combining and printing multiple files)
• Changing the halftone
For information on the features that are available on the
Macintosh, see the Printer Driver Guide.
Reference in the e- Manual “Printing Documents from a
Computer”
●Some scan features
<Examples>
• Creating a “Searchable PDF”
• Combine multiple data into a single PDF file.
For information on the features that are available on the
Macintosh, see the Canon Scanner Driver Guide.
Reference in the e- Manual “Scanning”
In this manual, methods to operate in the Windows environment are explained as examples. To view how to use printer drivers or
utilities for Macintosh, see the following driver guides (HTML files) or driver help systems.
Function Object Reference
Print function
Installing the Printer Driver • MF Driver Installation Guide
• Printer Driver Guide
Printing • Printer Driver Guide
Using each feature • Printer Driver’s Help
• Printer Driver Guide
Fax function
(D1370/D1350
Only)
Installing the Fax Driver • MF Driver Installation Guide
• Canon Fax Driver Guide
Sending a fax • Canon Fax Driver Guide
Using each feature • Canon Fax Driver Guide
Scan function Installing the Scanner Driver • MF Driver Installation Guide
• Canon Scanner Driver Guide
Scanning (Setting the MF Toolbox or ScanGear MF) • Canon Scanner Driver Guide
For Macintosh Users
11-5
Appendix
Index
Documents
Clearing Jams ............................................................... 9-2
Placing .............................................................................. 2-4
Receiving Faxes ........................................................ 6-11
Requirements ............................................................... 2-2
Scan Area ........................................................................ 2-3
Sending Faxes .............................................................. 6-2
Documents Requirements ................................. 2-2
E
Error Code ................................................................ 9-9
F
Fax Documents in the Memory
Forwarding ................................................................. 6-15
History............................................................................ 6-20
Received Fax Documents .................................. 6-19
Transmission Documents .................................. 6-18
Fax mode .................................................................. 1-6
Fax Settings .......................................................... 6-22
Feeder ........................................................................ 1-2
G
Group Dialing
Editing ............................................................................... 5-9
Storing .............................................................................. 5-9
H
Handling .................................................................... xv
C
Canceling
Fax Jobs ............................................................................ 6-6
Changing the Default Values
Copy ................................................................................ 3-12
Fax .................................................................................... 6-21
Cleaning the Machine .......................................... 8-2
Exterior ............................................................................. 8-2
Fixing Unit ...................................................................... 8-2
Platen Glass.................................................................... 8-3
Coded dial ................................................................ 5-2
Coded Dial Codes
Editing ............................................................................... 5-6
Storing .............................................................................. 5-6
Contents of the Setting Menu ....................... 10-2
Copying ..................................................................... 3-1
2-Sided Copying ......................................................... 3-6
Collating Copies ......................................................... 3-8
Enlarging/Reducing Copies ................................ 3-7
ID Card .............................................................................. 3-9
N on 1 ................................................................................ 3-7
Copy Mode .............................................................. 1-6
Copyright ................................................................... xx
D
Date Settings ........................................................ 1-12
Density
Copy ................................................................................... 3-5
Disclaimers ................................................................ xxi
Display ....................................................................... 1-6
Display Messages ....................................................... 9-8
LCD (Standby Mode) ............................................... 1-6
Document feeder tray ......................................... 1-2
Document guides.................................................. 1-2
11-6
Appendix
I
Image Quality
Copy ................................................................................... 3-5
Fax ....................................................................................... 6-3
Installation ............................................................... xiv
Requirements .............................................................. xviii
Space ................................................................................ xviii
L
LAN port ................................................................... 1-3
M
Main Specifications ............................................ 11-2
Copy specifications................................................ 11-2
Fax Specifications.................................................... 11-3
Machine Specifications ....................................... 11-2
Printer Specification .............................................. 11-2
Scanner Specifications ........................................ 11-3
Telephone Specifications ................................... 11-3
Maintenance and Inspections ................... xvi, xix
Manual Sending ..................................................... 6-8
Multi-purpose Tray
Paper Guide ................................................................... 1-2
O
One-Touch Keys
Editing ............................................................................... 5-3
Storing .............................................................................. 5-3
Operation Panel ............................................ 1-2, 1-4
Output tray .............................................................. 1-2
P
Paper
Clearing Jams ............................................................... 9-2
Loading ............................................................................ 2-9
Paper Size and Type............................................... 2-14
Printable Area ............................................................... 2-8
Supported Paper Types .......................................... 2-6
Paper Drawer ................................................. 1-2, 1-4
Platen glass .............................................................. 1-3
Power Supply .......................................................... xiv
Requirements .............................................................. xviii
Printing a User Data List ................................... 10-2
Printing from a Computer .................................. 4-1
R
Registering/Setting the Various Functions
... 10-1
RX Mode ................................................................ 6-11
Answer mode ............................................................ 6-13
Auto mode .................................................................. 6-11
Changing ..................................................................... 6-14
Fax/Tel Auto Switch mode ................................ 6-12
Manual mode ............................................................ 6-13
S
Scan Area .................................................................. 2-3
Scan Functions ....................................................... 7-1
Scan Mode ............................................................... 1-6
Selecting Print Side ............................................ 2-17
Sequential Broadcast ........................................ 6-10
Sharpness
Copy ................................................................................... 3-8
Fax ....................................................................................... 6-3
Sleep Timer ........................................................... 1-11
Specifying Destinations ...................................... 6-4
11-7
Appendix
T
Telephone Equipment ........................................ xvii
Telephone line jack ............................................... 1-3
Text Input Method ................................................ 1-9
Time Settings ....................................................... 1-12
Toner Cartridge
Handling .......................................................................... 8-6
Replacing Toner Cartridge ................................... 8-8
Trademarks ................................................................ xx
Transporting the Machine ............................... 8-14
Troubleshooting .................................................... 9-1
Clearing Jams ............................................................... 9-2
Error Code ...................................................................... 9-9
If You Cannot Solve a Problem ....................... 9-14
When a Power Failure Occurs ......................... 9-15
When <Incorrect Size/Setting> Appears
..... 9-12
U
USB port .................................................................... 1-3
W
When <Incorrect Size/Setting> Appears ... 9-12
11-8
Appendix
11-9
Appendix
FT5-4226 (010) XXXXXXXXXX Copyright CANON INC. 2013 PRINTED IN CHINA
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC.
16-6, Konan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan
CANON U.S.A., INC.
One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A.
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON CHINA CO. LTD.
15F Jinbao Building No.89, Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, PRC
CANON SINGAPORE PTE LTD
1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
CANON AUSTRALIA PTY LTD
1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney NSW 2113, Australia
CANON GLOBAL WORLDWIDE SITES
http://www.canon.com/
Serial No.
Date of Purchase

Navigation menu